JP2016209578A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having a satisfactory game machine for acquiring a lottery.SOLUTION: A flow path in that a game ball flows down can be switched in the flow path for composing a delay device 5300, and a period required for flowing down the delay device 5300 changes depending on which flow path composed by the delay device 5300 the game ball flows down, thus reducing a risk of discharge of the game ball from respective detection ports 312d, 5314c ranging from the delay device 5300.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a entrance that can acquire a lottery opportunity based on a game ball entering (Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-156058 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the way of obtaining a lottery. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that has a good lottery acquisition.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is capable of detecting a game area in which a game ball can flow down and the passage of at least a part of the game ball flowing down the game area. A detecting unit, a connecting channel that connects the game area and the detecting unit so that a game ball can flow down, and a switching unit configured to switch the channel through which the game ball flows down in the connecting channel. The connection flow path includes at least one flow path, and a period required for the game ball to flow down the connection flow path depends on which flow path of the flow path that the connection flow path constitutes. Change.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the detection means detects passage of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the connection flow path and detects passage of the game ball. Accordingly, at least one is provided, and the connection flow path includes a first flow path connected to one of the detection means and a first flow thereof. A second flow path that is at least partially different from the path and is connected to one of the detection means, the second flow path passing through the first flow path from the gaming area Compared with the period required for the game ball to flow down to the detection means, the flow path is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time for the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the switching means is caused by the game ball flowing down the first flow path, and thereafter the game ball is moved to the second flow path. The period during which the change state is changed to flow down and the change state is maintained is defined regardless of the game ball flowing down the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve the lottery acquisition.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the period during which the sphere flows down the second channel is longer than the period during which the sphere flows down through the first channel. This makes it possible to improve the lottery acquisition.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 2, the period during which the switching means is maintained in the change state is defined regardless of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path. By doing so, it is possible to improve the lottery acquisition.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a back exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a delay device. It is sectional drawing of the delay device in the VII-VII line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the delay device in the VIII-VIII line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of a slide moving member. (A) is a front view of a slide moving member, (b) is a side view of the slide moving member as viewed in the direction of arrow Xb in FIG. 10 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. It is a top view of the slide movement member in the arrow Xc direction view, (d) is a fragmentary sectional view of the slide movement member in the Xd-Xd line | wire of Fig.10 (a). It is a front perspective view of a distribution apparatus and a 2nd adjustment apparatus. (A) is a front view of a distribution device and a second adjustment device, (b) is a side view of the distribution device and the second adjustment device in the direction of arrow XIIb in FIG. 12 (a), (c) FIG. 12A is a top view of the sorting device and the second adjusting device as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIIc in FIG. 12A, and FIG. 12D is a diagram of the sorting device and the second adjusting device along the line XIId-XIId in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view. It is a front view of a delay device. It is a front view of a delay device. (A) to (c) is a cross-sectional view of the second adjustment device in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis. (A) to (d) are cross-sectional views of the functional disk device viewed from a cross-section in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis. (A) And (b) is the partial front view of a delay device. (A) And (b) is the partial front view of a delay device. (A) And (b) is the partial front view of a delay device. It is a partial front view of a delay device. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the delay device. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. (A) is a top view of a fan-shaped member, (b) is a side view of the fan-shaped member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIIb in FIG. 23 (a), and (c) is XXIIIc- in FIG. 23 (a). It is sectional drawing of the fan-shaped member in the XXIIIc line, (d) is a bottom view of the fan-shaped member in the arrow XXIIId direction view of FIG.23 (b). (A) is a side view of a link member, (b) is a bottom view of the link member in the arrow XXIVb direction view of FIG. 24 (a). (A) is a top view of a fan-shaped member and a link member, (b) is sectional drawing of the fan-shaped member and link member in the XXVb-XXVb line | wire of Fig.25 (a). It is a top view of a fixed floor. (A) is sectional drawing of the fixed bed in the XXVIIa-XXVIIa line of FIG. 26, (b) is sectional drawing of the fixed bed in the XXVIIb-XXVIIb line of FIG. (A) is a partial top view of the delay floor device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 28 (a), and (c) is a portion of the delay floor device. It is a top view and (d) is sectional drawing of the delay bed device in the XXVIIId-XXVIIId line | wire of FIG.28 (c). (A) is a top view of the delay floor device, (b) is a sectional view of the delay floor device along the line XXIXb-XXIXb in FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delay floor device. FIG. 29D is a sectional view of the delay bed device taken along line XXIXd-XXIXd in FIG. (A) is a top view of a delay floor device, (b) is sectional drawing of the delay floor device in the XXXb-XXXb line | wire of Fig.30 (a). (A) is a top view of the delay floor device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device along the line XXXIb-XXXIb in FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delay floor device. FIG. 31D is a cross-sectional view of the delay bed device taken along line XXXId-XXXId in FIG. (A) is a top view of the delay floor device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delay floor device. FIG. 32D is a front view of the delay floor device when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIId in FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the delay bed device in the XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa line | wire of FIG.32 (c). (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the delay device in the second embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the delay device in the third embodiment. (A) to (c) is a partial front view of the delay device. (A) to (c) is a front view of the delay device in the fourth embodiment. (A) to (c) is a front view of the delay device. It is a partial front view of the delay device in a 5th embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a continuous passage groove. (A) is a front view of a stopping device, (b) is a top view of the stopping device in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a stop part and a stop apparatus. (A) And (b) is a front view of a stop part and a stop apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of each part, when the ball | bowl entered the 1st winning opening is detected. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the continuous passage groove | channel and an anchoring apparatus which shows an example of the motion of the ball | bowl in a continuous passage groove | channel. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the continuous passage groove | channel and an anchoring apparatus which shows an example of the motion of the ball | bowl in a continuous passage groove | channel. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the delay device in 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of an upper movable plate and a lower movable plate. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the delay device in the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of an upper movable plate and a lower movable plate. It is a partial front view of the delay device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 8th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a delay device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the mode of operation when the ball which entered the V prize opening is detected, and each part. It is a partial front view of the delay device in a ninth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the mode of operation when the ball which entered the V prize opening is detected, and each part.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 33, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device (not shown), a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, etc. A peripheral part is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (refer FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arrange | positioned by the made through-hole, and is being fixed with the tapping screw etc. from the front side of the game board 13. FIG.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  The number of passes through the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 of the ball is each reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above. Further, for example, as the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is larger, a shorter period is more easily selected as a variable display period on the display device. Similarly, the second winning opening 640 is also controlled.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a front-opening triangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close on the right side about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. )). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right side, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a is temporarily formed. It operates so that these states are repeated alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) at power-on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 comprising a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving on the front side, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory (including a driving motor 5521, solenoids 6521, 6522, 8521, and 8522) is connected, and the MPU 201 Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other device 228 includes a drive motor 472.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13. In FIG. 5, a state in which the delay device that flows down the game area and flows down into the first winning port 64 flows down from the game board 13 is illustrated.

  The ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 flows down through the delay device 300, is sent from the detection port 312d disposed at the lower end thereof, and passes through a detection sensor (not shown), so that a lottery is performed. That is, the lottery is not yet performed until the ball passes through the detection sensor after the ball enters the first winning port 64.

  Next, the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. 6 is a front view of the delay device 300, and FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the delay device 300 taken along the line VII-VII in FIG. In FIG. 7, the game board 13 is partially illustrated for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the delay device 300 has a groove formed therein, and forms a path through which the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down between the groove and the game board 13 that contacts the surface. A speed reducing device 320 having a main body member 310, a slide moving member 321 that slides relative to the main body member 310, a first adjusting device 330 that adjusts a return operation of the speed reducing device 320, and a rotation with respect to the main body member 310 The apparatus mainly includes a distribution device 340 that operates and distributes the spheres to different flow paths, and a second adjustment device 350 that is configured coaxially with the rotation shaft of the distribution device 340 and adjusts the return operation of the distribution device 340.

  The main body member 310 is a member that constitutes a groove that is open on the side facing the game board 13, and a first groove 311 in which a ball that has entered from the first winning port 64 first flows down, and a first thereof. The second groove 312 that extends vertically downward from the lower end of the passage 311, and a path that extends laterally from the connecting portion between the first groove 311 and the second groove 312 and is longer than the extended length of the second groove 312. The third groove 313 connected to the detection port 312d and a support plate that extends in a plate shape from the front side of the bottom plate portion opening 311b to the lower side of the first groove 311 and supports the slide moving member 321 And 314 mainly.

  The first groove 311 is a ball in the depth direction center portion (the depth direction center portion of the sphere) of the bottom plate of the passage 311a and the main passage 311a for lowering the ball entered from the first winning opening 64 in a straight line obliquely downward. A bottom plate portion opening 311b which is an opening formed with a width shorter than the radius of the top plate portion, a top plate portion opening 311c which is opened with a width capable of projecting the wind turbine member 322 of the speed reducer 320 at the top plate portion, A pair of bearing portions 311d that are disposed in the depth direction across the plate portion opening 311c and that serve as bearings for the windmill member 322, and a back portion that is recessed with a size capable of rolling a ball from the main passage 311a to the back side. And a side recessed portion 311e.

  The back-side recessed portion 311e is a recessed portion connected in the vicinity of the entrance of the main passage 311a, and the bottom surface of the back-side recessed portion 311e is the same height as the bottom surface of the main passage 311a. It is comprised in the aspect which rises rather than.

  The second groove 312 is a contact wall 312a that applies a load that rebounds the sphere that has reached the lower end of the first groove 311 in the left-right direction, and a recess formed in the plate portion on the back side (the back side in FIG. 6). A recessed portion 312b that is recessed in an arc shape so that the device 340 can be disposed, a receiving wall portion 312c that receives a sphere flowing in from the third groove 313 and acts as a detent for the sorting device 340, and a sphere It mainly includes a detection port 312d and a side wall portion 312e facing the recessed portion 312b.

  The support plate portion 314 includes a pair of long holes 314a through which the guide rod portions 321c of the slide moving member 321 are inserted. The long hole 314a is configured to have the same direction as the long hole 331a of the first adjustment device 330 (configured to overlap in the front-rear direction).

  The speed reducing device 320 mainly includes a slide moving member 321 that slides as the ball passes through the first groove 311, and a windmill member 322 that is engaged with the slide moving member 321 and rotates while being in contact with the ball. Prepare for.

  The slide moving member 321 is guided by a long hole 314a of the main body member 310 and a long hole 331a of the first adjusting device 330 described later, and can be operated linearly.

  The windmill member 322 is radially supported from a shaft portion of the main body gear portion 322a, and a main body gear portion 322a having a gear portion that is supported by the bearing portion 311d and meshed with the slide moving member 321 at the end on the back side. The pair mainly includes a first extending wing portion 322b and a second extending wing portion 322c that form an angle of 90 ° with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the first extending wing portion 322b and the second extending wing portion 322c are configured to extend from the top plate opening 311c toward the inside of the first groove 311a, and The first extending wing portion 322b is disposed at a position where the first extending wing portion 322b can contact the sphere in an initial state in which the slide moving member 321 is maintained at the lower end position by gravity due to contact with the sphere flowing down the one groove 311a.

  The second extending wing portion 322c includes a protruding portion 322c1 that protrudes in a tapered shape in a direction approaching the first groove 311 from the state shown in FIG. The projecting portion 322c1 acts in such a manner that the spheres are separated when the spheres flow down the first groove continuously.

  The first adjustment device 330 includes a main body plate member 331 that is a plate-like member that sandwiches the main body member 310 with the game board 13, and is supported by the main body plate member 331 and the main body gear portion 322 a of the windmill member 322. And a rotation urging device 332 having a fixed gear portion 332a to be engaged with each other. The gear ratio of the fixed gear portion 332a to the main body gear portion 322a of the windmill member 322 is about 2. That is, as the windmill member 322 rotates 90 °, the rotation urging device 332 rotates 45 °.

  The main body plate member 331 is a long hole for guiding the slide moving member 321, and includes a pair of long holes 331a. The main body plate member 331 is also formed in the support plate portion 314 in which the same shape of the long holes 314a are opposed to each other. By being guided by these long holes 314a and 331a, the slide moving member 321 is configured to be slidable in the straight direction.

  The rotation urging device 332 includes a fixed gear portion 332a that is pivotally supported by the main body plate member 331, and a functional disk device 332b that is fixed to the fixed gear portion 332a at an end portion in the axial direction and has a recessed groove inside. Prepare for.

  The sorting device 340 is a device that is pivotally supported by the main body member 310 at the center hole 345 on the right side of the second groove 312 of the main body member 310, and is a ball that flows from the second groove 312b in the initial state shown in FIG. A first wall portion 341 for receiving, a second wall portion 342 disposed above the first wall portion 341 so as to be separated and separated by one ball, and a tip of the second wall portion 342 from the distal end portion of the sorting device 340 An arc wall portion 343 formed along an arc shape centering on the rotation axis, and a concave portion 312 of the second groove 312 that is formed in a disc shape and is disposed at a surface position and on the back side of the second groove 312. It mainly includes a complementary plate portion 344 that is formed in a manner that complements a part of the plate portion, and a center hole 345 that is a through hole that is pivotally supported by the main body member 310.

  The 2nd wall part 342 is provided with the front-end | tip convex part 342a convexly provided in the radial direction by the extended front-end | tip. The tip convex portion 342a can apply a load counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 6) to the sorting device 340 by the sphere that flows down in contact with the arc wall portion 343, and is intended by the action of the sphere. It is possible to prevent the sorting device 340 from returning to the initial position side.

  The initial position of the sorting device 340 is defined by a stopper portion S1 that protrudes rearward from the game board 13. That is, at the initial position, the sorting device 340 stops when the tip of the arc wall 343 is stopped by the stopper S1. A driving force for rotating the sorting device 340 clockwise in front view (clockwise in FIG. 6) is generated by the second adjusting device 350.

  The second adjustment device 350 is a device that is fixed to the complementary plate portion 344 of the sorting device 340, and has a flow path in which the pseudo centroid sphere GB that changes the center of gravity can be moved. 15 will be described later.

  FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the delay device 300 taken along line VIII-VIII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the slide moving member 321 is disposed in the central portion of the main passage 311a. Thereby, when the slide moving member 321 protrudes inside the main passage 311a, the protruding portion 321a1 can be reliably brought into contact with the sphere flowing down the first groove 311.

  The sphere flowing down the main passage 311a can flow into the back side recessed portion 311e due to its shape. The back side recessed portion 311e has a return wall portion 311e1 configured so as to be closer to the main passage 311a side toward the downstream side (left side in FIG. 8). Thereby, the sphere that has flowed into the recessed portion 311e on the back side cannot be returned to the main passage 311a, and the occurrence of clogging of the sphere can be suppressed.

  Next, the slide moving member 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 is a front perspective view of the slide moving member 321, FIG. 10A is a front view of the slide moving member 321, and FIG. 10B is a view in the direction of arrow Xb in FIG. 10A. FIG. 10C is a side view of the slide moving member 321, and FIG. 10C is a top view of the slide moving member 321 when viewed in the direction of the arrow Xc in FIG. 10A, and FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the slide moving member 321 in the Xd-Xd line | wire.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the slide moving member 321 includes a long plate-shaped first projecting plate portion 321 a that projects in a central portion of the main passage 311 a of the delay device 300 in a plane parallel to the main passage, A second overhanging plate portion 321b that is connected to one end of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and extends downwardly with respect to the extending direction of the first overhanging plate portion 321a; A pair of round guide bar portions 321c extending in parallel at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the output plate portions 321a and 321b, and the depth direction with respect to each of the extended plate portions 321a and 321b (FIG. 10A). And a rack gear portion 321d that extends on a straight line at a position offset in the vertical direction and on which rack gear teeth are formed.

  The first overhanging plate portion 321a is a plate portion extending in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the main passage 311a in the assembled state (see FIG. 6), and is disposed at a sphere diameter interval. A projecting portion 321a1 projecting in a semicircular shape from the upper surface is provided. When the protruding portion 321a1 contacts the sphere, the speed of the sphere passing through the main path 311a (see FIG. 8) is reduced.

  The 2nd overhanging plate part 321b is provided with the convex part 321b1 which produces the effect | action similar to the convex part 321a1, and the inclined surface 321b2 (refer FIG.10 (d)) inclined downward toward the back | inner side. When the 2nd overhang | projection board part 321b has protruded inside the this channel | path 311a, it will be in the state which the ball | bowl which flows down becomes easy to go to the back side recessed part 311e by the inclined surface 321b2 (refer FIG. 8). Therefore, the passage period of the sphere can be made longer than the case where the sphere flows down along the extending direction of the main passage 311a.

  Since the extending direction of the first extending plate portion 321a and the second extending plate portion 321b is different, the first extending plate portion 321a protrudes inside the main passage 311a, while the second extending plate portion 321b is the main extension plate portion 321b. A state of being arranged outside the passage 311a can be formed. That is, the degree of deceleration of the sphere can be changed by the arrangement of the slide moving member 321, and details will be described later.

  The guide rod portion 321c is inserted through the long hole 331a of the first adjustment device 330 (see FIG. 6). Thereby, the slide moving member 321 is supported so as to be slidable along the extending direction of the long hole 331a.

  The rack gear portion 321d extends in parallel with the extending direction of the long hole 331a, and the rack gear teeth mesh with the main body gear portion 322a of the windmill member 322 (see FIG. 6). As a result, when the windmill member 322 rotates, the rack gear portion 321d is slid in the linear direction (the extending direction of the long hole 331a).

  Next, the distribution device 340 and the second adjustment device 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 is a front perspective view of the distribution device 340 and the second adjustment device 350, FIG. 12A is a front view of the distribution device 340 and the second adjustment device 350, and FIG. 12A is a side view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjustment device 350 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIIb in FIG. 12A, and FIG. 12C is the side view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjustment in the direction of the arrow XIIc in FIG. FIG. 12D is a top view of the device 350, and FIG. 12D is a partial cross-sectional view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjusting device 350 taken along the line XIId-XIId in FIG. FIG. 12D shows a state in which the pseudo centroid sphere GB rides on the deceleration wall 351d.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the front side of the complementary plate portion 344 is opened except for the portion occupied by the wall portions 341, 342, 343, and is used as a side wall of a passage through which a sphere flows down (see FIG. 6). .

  The second adjustment device 350 is fixed to the back side of the complementary plate portion 344 and has a center of gravity changing device 351 in which a channel for allowing the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB to flow is recessed, and a recessed portion of the center of gravity changing device 351. And a lid member 352 that is fixed to the center-of-gravity changing device 351 in such a manner that the lid is covered.

  The center-of-gravity changing device 351 includes a disk-shaped main body member 351a having a shallow recessed portion, a recessed groove portion 351b that is recessed in the body member 351a with a width that allows the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB to flow down, and the recessed groove portion. A partition wall 351c that allows the pseudo centroid ball GB to pass only at the tip portion, and a speed reduction mechanism that extends to one side of the flow path partitioned by the partition wall 351c and decelerates the flow of the pseudo centroid sphere A speed reducing wall portion 351d having one end of the partition wall 351c is pivotally supported by one end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 12A), and in one direction of the pseudo centroid ball GB (FIG. 12A, rightward direction). ) Is mainly provided with a directional valve 351e that allows only passage of a).

  The position of the center of gravity excluding the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB of the second adjustment device 350 is set to be the same as the center of rotation. That is, the posture in which the sorting device 340 is stable is determined depending on the position where the pseudo centroid ball GB is arranged with respect to the rotation center.

  Here, the pseudo centroid sphere GB is composed of a spherical object that is equal to or less than the weight of the sphere. For example, if the weight of the sphere is 5 grams, it is desirable to select a spherical object of about 2 to 4 grams as the pseudo centroid ball GB. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where forces are balanced between the sphere that has flowed into the sorting device 340 and the pseudo centroid ball GB, and the sorting device 340 can be rotated by the weight of the sphere.

  With reference to FIG.12 (d), the deceleration mechanism of the deceleration wall part 351d is demonstrated. The deceleration wall portion 351d is a portion on which both sides of the sphere are supported from below and the sphere rolls in this state. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the pseudo centroid sphere GB does not roll at a portion where the length from the rotation axis is the maximum diameter (radius r1) (FIG. 12 (d) the central portion in the left-right direction). The roller rolls in contact with the reduction wall portion 351d at a portion where the length from the rotating shaft is shorter than the maximum diameter (radius r′1). Therefore, when the rotational speed of the pseudo centroid sphere GB is the same, the speed is reduced compared to the speed of the pseudo centroid sphere GB when the pseudo centroid sphere GB rolls on the partition wall 351c (rolls with the radius r1). The speed of the pseudo centroid ball GB when rolling on the wall portion 351d (rolling with the radius r′1) can be reduced.

  In other words, the translational movement distance around one rotation of the pseudo centroid sphere GB can be shortened. When the pseudo centroid sphere GB is decelerated by this method, it can be decelerated while maintaining the rotational energy of the pseudo centroid sphere GB, so that braking is too effective and the pseudo centroid sphere GB stops at an unintended position. The situation can be avoided.

  In addition, since the degree of deceleration of the pseudo centroid sphere GB can be arbitrarily set by setting the contact position between the deceleration wall 351d and the pseudo centroid sphere GB (the rolling radius of the pseudo centroid sphere GB), a special material (high friction In addition, the pseudo centroid ball GB can be sufficiently decelerated even when the formation distance of the decelerating wall portion 351d is short.

  Next, the operation of the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. 13 and 14 are front views of the delay device 300. FIG. FIG. 13 illustrates a state immediately after a sphere flows through the main body member 310 in the initial state illustrated in FIG. 6, and FIG. 14 illustrates a state immediately after the sphere flows through the main body member 310 in the state of FIG. 13. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the distribution device 340 changes its posture between an initial state (see FIG. 6) and a change state (see FIG. 13) due to the passage of the sphere, and the speed reduction device 320 is the number of passages of the sphere. Thus, the state (the arrangement in the height direction) changes between the initial state (see FIG. 6), the intermediate state (see FIG. 13), and the raised state (see FIG. 14).

  Each state of the reduction gear 320 will be described. When the speed reduction device 320 is in the intermediate state, the slide moving member 321 moves and is disposed at a position where the protruding portion 321a protrudes from the bottom surface of the main passage 311a. Therefore, in this state, the sphere flowing into the main passage 311a comes into contact with the protruding portion 321a and flows down while being decelerated. In the intermediate state, the second overhanging plate portion 321 b is disposed outside the first groove 311.

  When the speed reducer 320 is in the raised state, the slide moving member 321 further projects into the main passage 311a, and the second projecting plate portion 321b is disposed above the bottom surface of the back-side recessed portion 311e. Since the second overhanging plate portion 321b has an inclined surface 321b (see FIG. 10) on its upper surface, the sphere that has flowed into the main passage 311a in this state is along the inclination of the inclined surface 321b, the recessed portion 311e on the back side. , And flows again to the lower end of the back-side recessed portion 311e, and then merges with the main passage 311a again.

  When the speed reducer 320 is in the raised state, the first projecting plate portion 321a projects to the inside of the main passage 311a, so that the road width (width in the height direction) of the main passage 31a is narrowed. Further, in the present embodiment, the slide moving member 321 slides in a direction inclined with respect to the extending direction of the main passage 311a, whereby the contact wall 312a of the second groove 312 and the first overhanging plate portion 321a are moved. The width with the end is narrowed. Therefore, the deceleration of the sphere can be performed by increasing the flow path resistance by narrowing the road width of the main passage 311a and narrowing the road width of the connecting portion between the first groove 311 and the second groove 312.

  Each state of the sorting device 340 will be described. When the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the sphere flowing into the sorting device 340 is received by the first wall portion 341. Then, the sorting device 340 rotates to the change state (see FIG. 13) by the weight of the sphere, and the sphere flows into the detection port 312d.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 312e is configured to project upward from the first wall portion 341 (projecting at a height equal to or higher than the radius of the sphere), the sphere flows into the third groove 313 side. It is suppressed. Therefore, when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state, the sphere that has flowed into the sorting device 340 can flow down vertically with a high probability (can flow down in the shortest period).

  When the sorting device 340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 13), the sphere flowing into the sorting device 340 contacts the arc wall portion 343 and flows into the third groove 313. In addition, since the circular arc wall part 343 is formed in the circular arc shape centering on the center hole 345 of the distribution apparatus 340, since the load at the time of a sphere colliding is applied to the direction toward the rotating shaft of the distribution apparatus 340, Applying a load in the rotation direction to the sorting device 340 is suppressed.

  Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sorting device 340 returns to the initial state unintentionally due to an impact applied to the sorting device 340 by a ball flowing into the sorting device 340 in the changed state, and the sorting device 340 changes for a predetermined period. It can be ensured that the state is maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, adjustment of the posture change timing of the distribution device 340 will be described. FIGS. 15A to 15C are cross-sectional views of the second adjustment device 350 in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis. 15A to 15C, the internal structure of the center-of-gravity changing device 351 is visible, and FIG. 15A shows the case where the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6). FIG. 15B illustrates the case where the distribution device 340 is in the change state (see FIG. 13). In FIG. 15C, the state immediately before the distribution device 340 returns from the change state to the initial state. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the second adjustment device 350, the pseudo centroid ball GB moves inside the recessed groove portion 351b with the change in posture. Thereby, the position of the center of gravity of the second adjustment device 350 fluctuates, and the second adjustment device 350 repeatedly stops and rotates.

  The operation of the second adjustment device 350 will be described. As shown in FIG. 15A, in the case where the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the pseudo centroid ball GB is arranged on the right side of the center hole 345. A load is applied in a direction in which the second adjustment device 350 is rotated clockwise in front view (clockwise in FIG. 15). Thereby, even if the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1) vibrates somewhat, the sorting device 340 can maintain the posture at the initial position.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (b), when the sorting device 340 is changed (see FIG. 13), the slope formed by the partition wall 351c and the direction valve 351e is inclined downward toward the left. In addition, the inclination formed by the deceleration wall portion 351d is inclined downward as it goes to the right. Therefore, the pseudo centroid ball GB rolls on the upper side of the partition wall 351c and flows to the left along the arrow L1, falls at the end to the deceleration wall 351d, rolls on the upper side of the deceleration wall 351d, and moves to the arrow L2. It moves to the right along.

  As a result, the pseudo centroid sphere GB can be sent to the left of the center hole 345, so that the second adjustment device 350 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front (counterclockwise in FIG. 15) by the weight of the pseudo centroid sphere GB. Load is applied in the direction. Thereby, the sorting apparatus 340 can be maintained in a change state for a certain period (a period until the pseudo centroid sphere GB passes to the right of the center hole 345).

  The period during which the change state is maintained can be arbitrarily changed depending on the degree of deceleration of the pseudo centroid ball GB by the deceleration wall portion 351d. For example, if the flow-down speed of the pseudo centroid ball GB is halved by the deceleration wall portion 351d, the period during which the sorting device 340 is maintained in the change state can be doubled.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of the deceleration wall part 351d. For example, a method of decelerating the translational movement speed of the pseudo centroid sphere GB by decreasing the radius of rotation at the point where the quasi centroid sphere GB contacts the deceleration wall 351d is exemplified (see FIG. 12D). That is, the rotation of the pseudo centroid sphere GB is not received at the maximum diameter portion (center portion) but at the portion where the diameter is reduced (near the end portion), so that the translational movement distance around one rotation of the pseudo centroid sphere GB is obtained. This is a method of shortening and decelerating the pseudo centroid ball GB without reducing the rotation speed. According to this method, the translational speed of the pseudo centroid ball GB after passing through the deceleration wall portion 351d can be increased as compared with the case where the rotational speed of the pseudo centroid sphere GB is decreased.

  Therefore, immediately after reaching the right end of the deceleration wall portion 351d, the pseudo centroid ball GB can be sent to the right at a high speed, and immediately after the pseudo centroid ball GB reaches the right end of the deceleration wall portion 351d, FIG. The period until the state changes to the state shown in (c) can be shortened.

  As shown in FIG. 15C, the pseudo centroid ball GB passes through the directional valve 351e before and after the sorting device 340 changes state from the changed state to the initial state. As shown in FIG. 15C, the directional valve 351e allows the pseudo centroid sphere GB to flow to the right while preventing the pseudo centroid sphere GB from flowing to the left. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the pseudo centroid ball GB from bouncing back and returning to the left of the center hole 345.

  In the present embodiment, the period from when the distribution device 340 changes to the changed state to when it returns to the initial state is a variable period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) is four. It is set to a period longer than (the shortest fluctuation period).

  For this reason, when the ball sorting device 340 is in the initial state, a ball enters the sorting device, and the ball enters the detection port 312d (see FIG. 6), so that the number of reserved balls in the winning port 64 becomes four. In addition, the balls that have entered the distribution device 340 before the change started thereafter (before the number of reserved balls in the winning hole 64 becomes empty) are all distributed to the third groove 313 (see FIG. 13). Then, while the ball passes through the third groove 313, the change of 1 of the winning opening 64 is completed, and the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is vacant, so that the winning opening 64 overflows (the number of reserved balls is maximum). Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a lottery opportunity cannot be obtained even though the ball enters the ball by entering the ball into the detection port 312d.

  Note that the degree of deceleration of the sphere in the third groove 313 can be set by various methods. For example, the ball may be decelerated by sticking a high friction sheet on the bottom wall on which the ball rolls.

  Here, as a first setting example, a period until the ball has passed through the third groove 313 is, for example, a variation period (shortest variation period) that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is four. By setting a longer period, when two balls enter the sorting device 340 in succession, the second ball enters the third groove after the first ball enters the detection port 312d. The period from passing through 313 to entering the detection port 312d can be made longer than the variation period (shortest variation period) that is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is four. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64.

  Further, as a second setting example, a period until the ball passes through the third groove 313 is set, for example, when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is three, a change period that is easily selected, and the number of held balls is four. Even if two balls are continuously entered in the third groove 313 by setting a period longer than the total of the fluctuation periods (shortest fluctuation periods) that can be easily selected in the case of one piece Since the fluctuation of two times is digested in the period from when the eyeball enters the detection port 312d to when the second ball passes through the third groove 313 and enters the detection port 312d, Even if two balls enter the detection port 312d, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

  Next, the functional disk device 332b will be described with reference to FIG. The functional disk device 332b changes the position of the center of gravity in the same manner as the second adjustment device 350 by moving the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB arranged between the main body plate member 331 (see FIG. 7) and the functional disk device. This is a device that changes the direction of the load applied to 332b.

  FIG. 16A to FIG. 16D are cross-sectional views of the functional disk device 332b as seen in a cross section in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis. 16A illustrates the case where the speed reduction device 320 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), and in FIG. 16B, the state immediately after the speed reduction device 320 changes from the initial state to the intermediate state (see FIG. 13). FIG. 16C illustrates the state immediately after the speed change device 320 changes from the intermediate state to the lifted state (see FIG. 14), and FIG. 16D illustrates the speed reduction device 320 from the intermediate state to the initial state. The state immediately after the state change is shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the functional disk device 332 b includes a partition groove 332 b 1 that is recessed from the back side at a depth that allows the pseudo centroid ball GB to move, and a partition that partitions the sphere through a limited portion. The wall 332b2 and the partition wall 332b2 are arranged on the lower side of the partition wall 332b2 as a plate portion that can roll a ball, and are formed so as to project a predetermined width from the end of the partition wall 332b2, and the flow of the pseudo centroid ball GB is decelerated. A first deceleration wall portion 332b3, a second deceleration wall portion 332b4 that is disposed on the opposite side of the partition wall 332b2 across the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 and decelerates the flow of the pseudo centroid ball GB, and a pseudo centroid ball GB And a directional valve 332b5 that restricts the passage of the valve in one direction from the left side to the right side.

  For the sake of convenience, the pseudo centroid sphere GB uses the same symbol as the pseudo centroid sphere GB accommodated in the second adjustment device 350, and is limited to the pseudo centroid sphere GB having the same shape and weight. It is not the purpose.

  The functional disk device 332b can cause the pseudo centroid sphere GB to flow down through the first reduction wall portion 332b3 and pass through the direction valve 332b5, or can pass through the direction valve 332b5 down through the second reduction wall portion 332b4. . Hereinafter, the operation of the functional disk device 332b will be described in detail. In addition, FIG.6, FIG.13 and FIG.14 is referred suitably.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the speed reducer 3420 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the partition plate 332b is inclined downward toward the right, and the pseudo centroid ball GB is a functional disk device. It is maintained on the right side of 332b. Thereby, the load which maintains the slide moving member 321 below is applied with respect to the slide moving member 321 from the rotation urging | biasing apparatus 332 (refer FIG. 6). Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1) vibrates, the slide moving member 321 can be prevented from moving up and down.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the reduction gear 3420 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 13), the partition plate 332b2 is inclined downward to the left, while the first reduction wall portion 332b3 is It is set as the aspect inclined downward to the right. Therefore, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is simulated by rolling the upper surface of the partition plate 332b2 to the left along the arrow L3 and then rolling the upper surface of the first reduction wall portion 332b3 to the right along the arrow L4. The center of gravity sphere GB is sent to the right side of the center of rotation of the functional disk device 332b, and a load is applied in the direction of returning the functional disk device 332b to the initial state (the direction of rotating clockwise in FIG. 16).

  In the state where the pseudo centroid ball GB is disposed on the left side of the center of rotation as shown in FIG. 16 (b) in the middle of the flow of the pseudo centroid ball GB, the disk device 332b is counterclockwise in FIG. 16 (b) yesterday. Since the load is applied in the direction of rotating around, the lowering of the slide moving member 321 due to gravity can be stopped. Further, it is possible to suppress the slide moving member 321 from being lowered due to the weight of the sphere (even if the sphere is lowered, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere moves up as soon as it arrives).

  As shown in FIG. 16C, when the speed reduction device 3420 is in the ascending state (see FIG. 14), the first speed reduction wall portion 332b3 is inclined downward to the left, while the second speed reduction wall The portion 332b4 is inclined downward to the right. Therefore, the pseudo centroid ball GB rolls the upper surface of the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 to the left along the arrow L5, and then rolls the upper surface of the second deceleration wall portion 332b4 to the right along the arrow L6. As a result, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is sent to the right side of the center of rotation of the functional disk device 332b, and a load is applied in the direction of returning the functional disk device 332b to the initial state (the direction of rotating clockwise in FIG. 16).

  When the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB rolls on the upper surface of the first reduction wall portion 332b3, the ball passes through the passage 311a and the reduction device 320 moves to the raised state, and the functional disk device 332b is shown in FIG. In this case, the pseudo centroid ball GB is subsequently decelerated by the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 and further decelerated by the second deceleration wall portion 332b4, so that the reduction device 320 is in an intermediate state. Compared to the case (see FIG. 13), the period until the pseudo centroid ball GB is arranged to the right of the center of rotation is lengthened. Therefore, the speed reduction device 320 can be maintained in the ascending state (see FIG. 14) longer than the period during which the intermediate state (see FIG. 13) is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 16D, when the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB disposed on the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 or the second deceleration wall portion 332b4 is disposed on the right side of the center of the functional circle device 332b, the slide moving member The speed reduction device 320 is operated by the weight of 321, the functional disk device 332 b is in the same posture as the initial state, and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is discharged from the first speed reduction wall portion 332 b 3 or the second speed reduction wall portion 332 b 4, and the recessed groove portion Roll 332b1. The functional disk device 332b returns to the initial state (see FIG. 16A) when the pseudo centroid ball GB passes through the direction valve 332b5.

  With reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the flow pattern of the sphere flowing down inside the delay device 300 will be described. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a), and 18 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a), and 18 (b) illustrate a case where three balls P1 to P3 are successively entered from the winning opening 64, and FIG. FIG. 17A shows a state in which the balls P1 to P3 are arranged in front of the windmill member 322. In FIG. 17B, the balls P1 and P2 are separated from the second extending wing portion 322c of the windmill member 322. FIG. 18A shows a state where the ball P2 has pushed the second extending wing portion 322c and reached the sorting device 340. In FIG. 18B, the ball P3 is shown in FIG. A state in which the two grooves 312 begin to enter is illustrated.

  17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b), after balls P1 to P3 have entered the winning opening 64 in the lower right space of the structural drawing. A graph showing the situation is shown. In addition, the timing at which the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 is actually slightly shifted (about 0.2 seconds). However, in order to facilitate the understanding of the graph, the balls P1 to P3 are winning. It is illustrated as having entered the mouth 64 at the same time, and the horizontal axis is configured as an elapsed time T.

  The graph shows the timing ("IN") at which the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 and the timing ("OUT") at which the balls enter the detection port 312d. Which section flows down is indicated by a symbol. In addition, the timings in the graph indicating the states shown in FIGS. 17A, 17B, 18A, and 18B are indicated by triangular marks in the corresponding drawings.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, until the wind turbine member 322 is reached, the balls P1 to P3 flow down the first groove 311 under the same conditions, and there is no difference in speed.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, the first ball P1 pushes the first extending wing part 322b of the wind turbine member 322, and the second ball P2 is cut off by the second extending wing part 322c. Then, the preceding sphere P1 flows down without being decelerated to the protruding portion 321a1, while the protruding portion 321a1 protrudes into the main passage 311a on the downstream side of the sphere P2. Therefore, when the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 come into contact with the projecting portion 321a1, the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 are intermittently applied with a load in a direction opposite to the flow-down direction and decelerate. Thereby, since the space | interval between the ball | bowl P1 and the ball | bowl P2 can be spaced apart, for example, it is prevented that a ball | bowl is clogged and a malfunctioning by the ball | bowl entering two sorter | distribution apparatuses 340 simultaneously. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the first groove passage first period required for the ball P1 to pass through the first groove 311 is 2 seconds (T11 = 2s). The first deceleration recovery start period, which is a period from the intermediate state to the start of the return to the initial state, is set to 5 seconds, and the speed reducer is set to return to the initial state 1 second after the start of the return.

  Further, the second period T2, which is a period from when the ball P1 enters the second groove 312 to when it enters the detection port 312d, is 1.5 seconds (T2 = 1.5 s). The second period T2 is the first half of the second period T2a (T2a = 1s) which is 1 second before reaching the distribution device 340, and the second half of the second period which is 0.5 seconds after passing the distribution device 340. It is divided into T2b (T2b = 0.5 s), and the period during which the sphere passes through the second groove 312 is not changed regardless of the state of the sorting device 340.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the second ball P2 pushes forward the second extending wing 322c of the windmill member 322, the preceding ball P2 flows into the second groove, while the ball P3 is Then, it flows into the back side recessed portion 311e along the inclined surface 321b2 of the slide moving member 321. Thereby, in addition to being decelerated by the projecting portion 321a1, the flow path of the sphere P3 is extended by an amount corresponding to the depth of the recessed portion 311e, so that the space between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 can be spaced.

  In this embodiment, the first groove passing second period T12 required for the sphere P2 to pass through the first groove 311 is set to 3 seconds (T12 = 3 s), and the sphere P3 passes through the first groove 311. The first groove passing third period T13 required for the above is 6 seconds (T13 = 6s). The second deceleration recovery start period, which is a period from when the ball P2 passes through until the speed reduction device 320 starts to return to the initial state (from the ascending state), is 7 seconds. It is set to return to the initial state.

  Further, since the sphere P2 is in contact with the arc wall 343 of the sorting device 340 and flows into the third groove 313, the path to the detection port 312d is extended compared to the sphere P1. Therefore, the space between the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the third period T3 required for the balls P2 and P3 to pass through the third groove 313 is 3 seconds (T3 = 3s). In addition, the distribution maintaining period BT1, which is a period from when the distribution device 340 changes to the changed state to when it starts to return to the initial state, is 4 seconds, and the speed of the pseudo centroid ball GB of the second adjustment device 350 is It is set (BT1 = 4s).

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the speed reducer 320 is in the raised state, the distance between the end portion of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and the contact wall 312a is approximately the same as the diameter of the sphere. Is done. Accordingly, when the balls P2 and P3 pass between the end portion of the first projecting plate portion 321a and the contact wall 312a, a large resistance is applied, and the momentum is reduced. Thereby, the space | interval of the sphere P1 and sphere P2, P3 can be expanded.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the ball P2 flows down the third groove 313 and presses the first wall portion 341 against the receiving wall portion 312c, thereby making it easy to maintain the sorting device 340 in the changed state. it can.

  As shown in the graph, even when the ball P3 flows into the sorting device 340, the sorting device 340 is maintained in the changed state (at the timing when the distribution maintaining period BT1 has elapsed since the sorting device 340 changed to the changed state. The sphere P3 reaches the sorting device 340). Therefore, the sphere P3 flows into the third groove 313. Thereby, it can prevent that the space | interval of the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 shrinks.

  As shown in the graph, according to the present embodiment, when the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning port 64, the balls P1 and P2 enter the detection port 312d at intervals of 4 seconds, and the ball P2 And the ball P3 enter at intervals of 3 seconds. In the present embodiment, since the variation period of 1 selected after the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 becomes maximum is set to 3 seconds, in the case of FIGS. 17 and 18, an overflow occurs in the winning opening 64. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the sorting device 340 is maintained in the change state is one variation period selected after the number of retained balls in the winning opening 64 is maximized when a ball flows into the detection port 312d. 18A, when the ball P2 enters the sorting device 340 during the fluctuation period, the ball P2 surely flows into the third groove 313 as shown in FIG. be able to. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an overflow from occurring when the balls continuously enter the sorting device 340.

  Therefore, even when three balls P1 to P3 enter the winning port 64 in succession, the timing at which they enter the detecting port 312d can be shifted, and the occurrence of overflow at the winning port 64 can be suppressed. Can do. Thereby, even if a player does not pay special attention, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a lottery cannot be received even though a ball has entered the winning opening 64, and the game can be performed comfortably.

  In the present embodiment, when another ball enters the winning port 64 in succession to the rear of the ball P3 (when four balls are continuously entered), the fourth ball and the ball P3 are The timing of entering the detection port 312d cannot be shifted. For this reason, it is desirable to recommend a stop hit so as not to play a game in which as many as four balls enter the winning opening 64 when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is three.

  In addition, as shown in the graph, when the balls P1 to P3 continuously enter the winning port 64, for example, the ball P3 wins with an interval of 1 second or more after entering the winning port 64 of the ball P1. When entering the mouth 64, when the ball P3 reaches the sorting device 340, the sorting device 340 is returned to the initial state, so that the ball P3 flows down the second groove 312 in the vertical direction and the detection port 312d. Enter the ball. In this case, the delay period of the ball P3 is not sufficient, and the overflow at the winning opening 64 cannot be suppressed.

  Therefore, the effect of suppressing the overflow when the third ball enters the winning opening 64 has a limited situation (the ball P1 and the ball P2 continuously enter the winning opening 64, and then the ball P1 enters the ball. Can be played only in the situation where the ball P3 enters the winning opening 64 within one second from the start, so that the player does not have to make a stop, If you forget to stop launching the ball when the number of balls is 3, you can fortunately create a situation where no overflow occurs at the winning hole 64 if the situation is complete.

  This makes it possible to form a clear difference in the number of lottery opportunities with respect to the number of balls that enter the winning slot 64 between a player who makes a stop and a player who does not make a stop. When the number of balls held in the mouth 64 is 3, in a rare situation where three balls continuously enter the winning port 64, the third ball P3 does not overflow at the winning port 64. Strict conditions (limit the pitch interval), can produce valuable when overflow did not occur.

  As a result, the player who makes a stop-attack can be made to stop more carefully (because it can be stopped at an early stage by paying attention to the number of reserved balls) The operation of the handle 51 (see FIG. 1) for acquiring more can be performed with enthusiasm, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, a case where the balls P4 and P5 enter the delay device 300 with an interval therebetween will be described. FIGS. 19A, 19B, and 20 are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. FIG. 19A illustrates a state where the ball P4 has reached the windmill member 322 when the speed reduction device 320 is in the initial state, and FIG. 19B illustrates the speed reduction device 320 in the intermediate state and the distribution device 340. A case where the ball P5 enters the winning port 64 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 enters the detection port 312d (four seconds after the ball P4 enters) is shown in FIG. In FIG. 20, the state immediately before the ball P5 enters the sorting device 340 is illustrated. In FIGS. 19A, 19B, and 20, the horizontal axis is a graph showing the situation after the balls P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 in the space on the lower right of the structural drawing. This is illustrated as elapsed time T.

  In the graph, the timing ("IN") at which the balls P4, P5 enter the winning opening 64 and the timing ("OUT") at which the balls P4, P5 enter the detection port 312d are shown, and when and when the balls P4, P5 are Whether to flow down the section is indicated by a symbol. Also, the timing shown in the graph in the state shown in FIGS. 19A, 19B, and 20 is indicated by a triangle mark in the corresponding drawing.

  In the state shown in FIG. 20, the ball P5 does not enter the third groove 313, flows down the second groove 312 vertically, and enters the detection port 312d. Here, if the ball P5 enters the detection port 312d before the change immediately after the ball P4 enters the detection port 312d, the overflow may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first groove passage second period T12 required for the ball P5 to pass through the intermediate speed reduction device 320 is the fluctuation period (3) when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is four. (Second) is set to be longer than (second groove passing second period T12 is 3 seconds). In this case, even when the sphere P5 does not flow into the third groove 313 (flows down the second groove 312 in the vertical direction), the variation ends until the sphere P5 passes over the slide moving member 321. Overflow can be prevented from occurring at the winning opening 64. In this case, since the ball P5 does not flow down the third groove 313, the lottery timing by the ball P5 can be advanced, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

  In addition, since the distribution maintaining period BT1 from when the state of the distribution device 340 changes to when the distribution device 340 starts to return to the initial state is set to 4 seconds, the ball P4 enters the winning port 64 for 3 seconds (the winning port) It is possible to make sure that a ball that has entered during the period when the number of reserved balls of 64 is 4) enters the third groove 313. In addition, the ball can enter the third groove 313 until immediately after the sorting device 340 returns to the initial state, so that the ball P4 enters the winning opening 64 within less than 4 seconds. It is possible to surely make the ball that has been struck enter the third groove 313. Thereby, even when the balls P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 at intervals of 3 seconds or less, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a case where a ball enters the distribution device 340 continuously will be described. In the present embodiment, for example, when the speed reduction device 320 is in the ascending state (see FIG. 14), it is a state that occurs when two additional balls enter the winning opening 64 in succession (for example, FIG. 17 ( This is a situation that occurs when balls P1 and P2 shown in a) are entered, and after the balls P2 enter the second groove 312, two balls enter the winning opening 64 in succession). FIG. 21A to FIG. 21C are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 21A shows a state in which the sorting device 340 is in the initial state and the ball P6 enters the sorting device 340. In FIG. 21B, the sorting device 340 rotates with the weight of the ball P6, and the ball P6 rotates. FIG. 21C illustrates a state where P7 is pushed out, and FIG. 21C illustrates a state where the ball P6 has flowed down the second groove 312 and the ball P7 has flowed down the third groove 313.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the sorting device 340, a space in which only one sphere can be accommodated is provided between the first wall portion 341 and the second wall portion 342. Accordingly, when two balls reach the sorting device 340 in series, the first ball P6 is accommodated in the sorting device 340, but the second ball P7 remains without being accommodated. Accordingly, only the sphere P6 can flow down to the detection port 312d alone.

  The tip convex portion 342a disposed at the tip of the second wall portion 342 of the sorting device 340 is configured to leave the sphere P7 to the outside (see FIG. 21B), and the sphere P7 to the entrance of the third groove 313. It is formed in such a manner that it is pushed out (the inlet of the third groove 313 is formed at a position facing the tip convex portion 342a). Therefore, the sphere P7 can be pushed out to the back side of the third groove 313, and the sphere P7 can be prevented from staying near the entrance of the third groove 313. Thereby, for example, even when the sorting device 340 is set in such a manner that it immediately returns from the changed state to the initial state, the ball P7 is prevented from entering the sorting device 340 (not pushed into the third groove 313 well). can do.

  As shown in FIG. 21C, the ball P6 enters the detection port 312d with the sorting device 340 as a boundary, and the ball P7 flows into the detection port 312d after flowing down the third groove 313. Here, as described above, the third period T3, which is the period during which the ball P7 flows down the third groove 313, is set to 3 seconds, and this period is selected after the number of retained balls in the winning opening 64 is maximized. Since the variation period of 1 (3 seconds) or longer, the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d even if the ball P6 enters the detection port 312d when the number of reserved balls in the winning port 64 is three. Around this time, one change ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64 when the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d.

  In this embodiment, when another ball enters the detection port 312d within 3 seconds after the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d, an overflow at the winning port 64 occurs for that ball. The As a result, it is possible to configure a flow path in which an overflow can be suppressed if the number of balls entering in a short period is up to two, while an overflow occurs when the number of balls entering in a short period becomes three. Therefore, it is possible to make the player carefully consider the launch strength of the ball and the launch frequency of the ball to acquire more opportunities for lottery at the winning entrance 64, and improve the game playability regarding the launch mode of the ball. Can be made.

  Since the sorting device 340 rotates from the initial state to the changed state only with the weight of the sphere, the sphere P6 and the sphere P7 are disposed between the side wall portion 312e and the tip convex portion 342a. Problems that occur only when the sorting device 340 is electrically operated, such as the sorting device 340 operating and causing ball clogging, can be solved.

  In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 21C, for example, the ball reaches the distribution device 340 at the timing when the distribution device 340 returns to the initial state within 1 second after arrival, and the next ball further distributes. If the sorting device 340 is reached 1 second after 340 returns to the initial state, the ball that has reached first and the ball that has reached later may collide at the joining position of the first groove 311 and the third groove 313. In this case, two spheres enter the detection port 312d at intervals of 3 seconds or less. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 20) is three while the previous ball passes through the third groove 313, overflow at the winning opening 64 cannot be avoided.

  This is greatly different from the case where two balls reach the sorting device 340 when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state. That is, when two balls arrive at the sorting device 340 at intervals of 2 seconds when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state, the subsequent balls are guided to the third groove 313, and thus enter the detection port 312d. It is possible to secure an interval of 3 seconds or more (see FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the distribution device 340 is in the change state, when the ball reaches the distribution device 340 at intervals of 2 seconds, the previous ball is guided to the third groove 313, and the subsequent ball moves down the second groove 312 vertically. There is a possibility that the ball will flow down and the interval of entering the detection port 312d may be shorter than 3 seconds.

  Thereby, when two balls enter the entrance 64 in succession, it is possible to configure a flow path that cannot always suppress overflow. Therefore, while having a mechanism capable of suppressing overflow, basically, the maximum number of lotteries can be obtained by playing a game that stops when the number of balls held in the winning opening 64 becomes three. The significance of hitting can be improved.

  Next, the delay floor device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 22, in the delay bed device 400, a part of the sphere flowing down to the left of the center frame 86 flows (through a so-called “warp flow path”), and the sphere rolls in the upper part. A fan-shaped member 410 that is configured to be capable of being moved in a reciprocating manner and that drops a ball whose velocity in the left-right direction has converged to 0 to the near side, and that is formed as a pair of front and rear and capable of tilting. And a link member 420 (see FIG. 24) that matches the operations of the pair of fan-shaped members 410, and a fixed floor that supports the fan-shaped member 410 in a tiltable manner and passes through a sphere before flowing into the fan-shaped member 410. A fixed floor 430 is mainly provided.

  In the initial state (see FIG. 22), the delay floor device 400 is configured in such a manner that the sphere can be easily converged at the center position in the left-right direction (the left and right peripheral portions of the fixed floor 430 are inclined downward toward the center position. And the center position of the fan-shaped member 410 and the center position of the winning hole 64 are arranged in a vertical relationship. That is, the arrangement is such that a ball can easily enter the winning opening 64 from the delay floor device 400.

  Of the fan-shaped members 410 arranged in a pair of front and rear, the front fan-shaped member 410 tilts in a manner of tilting forward toward the front side, whereby the ball can easily enter the winning opening 64.

  The fan-shaped member 410 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, since a pair of fan-shaped member 410 is comprised from the same member, description of one fan-shaped member 410 is performed and description of the other fan-shaped member 410 is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 23 (a) is a top view of the fan-shaped member 410, FIG. 23 (b) is a side view of the fan-shaped member 410 in the direction of arrow XXIIIb in FIG. 23 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the fan-shaped member 410 in the XXIIIc-XXIIIc line | wire of Fig.23 (a), FIG.23 (d) is a bottom view of the fan-shaped member 410 in the arrow XXIIId direction view of FIG.23 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 23, the fan-shaped member 410 includes a main body member 411 composed of a fan-shaped plate member, and an extending arm portion 412 that extends coaxially linearly from the middle position of the main body member 411. A pair of convex portions fixed from the bottom surface of the body member 411 and having a through hole into which the connecting rod 414 is inserted and fixed; and a connecting rod 414 inserted and fixed into the convex fixing portion 413. Prepare mainly.

  In the main body member 411, the tapering side (the lower side in FIG. 23A) has a width approximately equal to the diameter of the sphere. In addition, the taper side has a chamfered portion 411 a that is inclined downward, and an opening 411 b that is formed between the convex fixing portions 413.

  The connecting rod 414 is configured as a separate member from the main body member 411. When assembling, the link member 420 (see FIG. 24) is disposed between the protruding fixing portions 413, and the connection rod 414 is inserted into the adjustment long hole 422 of the link member 420, and the connection rod 414 is fixed to the protruding fixing portion 413. Thereby, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 can be connected (refer FIG. 25).

  Next, the link member 420 will be described with reference to FIG. The link member 420 is a member having a role of connecting a pair of fan-shaped members 410 and determining the operation direction to be constant.

  FIG. 24A is a side view of the link member 420, and FIG. 24B is a bottom view of the link member 420 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIVb in FIG. As shown in FIG. 24, the link member 420 has a main body member 421 formed of a plate-like member having an L-shaped cross section and a constant thickness (see FIG. 24B), and a pair of front and rear in the upper part of the main body member 421. An adjustment slot 422 that is drilled in the thickness direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and a support slot 423 that is drilled in the thickness direction and extends in the vertical direction at the lower portion of the main body member 421 are mainly provided. .

  The adjustment long hole 422 is a hole through which the connecting rod 414 (see FIG. 23) of the fan-shaped member 410 is inserted. That is, the link member 420 and the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are connected via the adjustment long hole 422. The support long hole 423 is a long hole through which the support convex portion 434 (see FIG. 26) of the fixed floor 430 is inserted, and acts in such a manner that the moving direction of the link member 420 is designated as one direction (vertical direction).

  With reference to FIG. 25, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the front assembled state will be described. FIG. 25A is a top view of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420, and FIG. 25B is a cross-sectional view of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 along the line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. . Note that the pre-assembled state shown in FIG. 25 refers to a sub-assembly state before being assembled to the fixed floor 430. In the manufacturing process, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are assembled to the fixed floor 430 after configuring the pre-assembled state.

  In the pre-assembled state, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are connected to each other by fixing the connecting rod 414 of the fan-shaped member 410 to the protruding fixing portion 413 while being inserted into the adjustment long hole 422 of the link member 420. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 25, since the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are connected by the link member 420, the operation is transmitted to the other fan-shaped member 410 via the link member 420 when the one fan-shaped member 410 is operated. It is comprised by the aspect.

  Next, the fixed floor 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. 26 is a top view of the fixed floor 430, FIG. 27A is a cross-sectional view of the fixed floor 430 along the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 26, and FIG. 27B is a cross-sectional view of XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the fixed floor 430 in a line. 26 and 27 show a state where the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are removed. Moreover, in FIG. 26, the support part 432 is partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 26, 27 (a) and 27 (b), the fixed floor 430 is provided with a fan-shaped member 410 in the assembled state (see FIG. 22), and the upper surface of the fan-shaped member 410 and the fixed floor 430 are arranged. The portion between the rotation shafts of the fan-shaped member 410 is recessed corresponding to the thickness of the fan-shaped member 410 so as to be formed at the surface position, and the outer portion is recessed so as not to interfere with the movement of the fan-shaped member 410. The recessed floor 431 to be formed, the support portion 432 on which the extended arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410 is supported when disposed on the recessed floor 431, and the central portion of the recessed floor 431 are vacated vertically. In a hollow portion 433 that is a hollow, a support convex portion 434 that protrudes in the left-right direction from the side wall that forms the hollow portion 433, and a position that the fan-shaped member 410 is shifted to the left and right from the closest position in the assembled state Sphere can flow An inlet 435 which is recessed in a size, a delay channel 436 balls flowing down communicated with from the inlet 435 mainly comprises a.

  The support portion 432 includes a support groove portion 432a configured in a groove shape that supports the extending arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410, and a support lid portion 432b that covers the support groove portion 432a from above.

  The cavity portion 433 is a cavity in which the link member 420 is accommodated, and the support convex portion 434 is a projection portion that is inserted into the support long hole 423 of the link member 420. Note that when the link member 420 is assembled, the link member 420 is inserted into the gap between the cavity portion 433 and the tip of the support convex portion 434, and then the link member 420 is slid in the left-right direction to support the convex portion. The portion 434 can be inserted through the support slot 423.

  The inflow port 435 has a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the member covers the inlet 435 so as to block a part of the inlet 435, the sphere cannot flow into the inlet 435.

  The delay channel 436 is a channel for delaying the ball entering the winning port 64 with respect to the ball directly entering the winning port 64 from the fan-shaped member 410. For example, by making the period of time required for the ball to pass through the delay passage 436 to be longer than the one fluctuation period that occurs when the ball enters the winning port 64, the overflow at the winning port 64 may occur. Can be suppressed.

  For example, by setting the period of time required for the ball to pass through the delay channel 436 to be longer than the variable period that is easily selected when the number of retained balls in the winning opening 64 is 4, the number of retained balls in the winning opening 64 can be increased. Even when the second ball enters the inlet 435 immediately after the first ball dropped from the fan-shaped member 410 directly enters the winning port 64 in the three states, the two Since one change is completed by the time the eyeball enters the winning opening 64, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64 due to the second ball entering the winning opening 64. it can.

  A method of assembling the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 (see FIG. 25) to the fixed floor 430 will be described. First, among the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the above-described pre-assembled state, the link member 420 is inserted into the hollow portion 433, and the support long hole 423 (see FIG. 25) is inserted into the support convex portion 434 by the above-described method. Then, the extended arm portion 412 (see FIG. 25) of the fan-shaped member 410 is placed on the support groove portion 432a, and the support lid portion 432b is put on and fitted into the support groove portion 432a, whereby the fan-shaped member 410 is supported by the support portion of the fixed floor 430. The link member 420 is supported by 432 so as to be tiltable, and is supported so as to be vertically movable (along the extending direction of the support slot 423). Thereby, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are assembled to the fixed floor 430, and the delay floor device 400 is configured.

  With reference to FIG. 28, the state change of the delay floor device 400 will be described. FIG. 28A is a partial top view of the delay bed device 400, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the delay bed device 400 taken along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. ) Is a partial top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 28 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 taken along line XXVIIId-XXVIIId in FIG. 28 (c).

  In the initial state shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are in a parallel posture, and in the tilted state shown in FIGS. 28 (c) and 28 (d), the fan-shaped members are arranged. The posture 410 is inclined by about 45 ° from the initial state.

  A major difference between the initial state and the tilted state is whether or not a sphere can enter the inlet 435 and whether or not the sphere can pass through an intermediate position between the pair of fan-shaped members 410. As for the former, in the initial state, a part of the fan-shaped member 410 is covered on the upper part of the inlet 435, so that the sphere cannot enter the inlet 435. Since the fan-shaped member 410 retracts from the upper part of the inlet 435 (because it is tilted to the retracted position), the ball can enter the inlet 435.

  As for the latter, in the initial state, the fan-shaped member 410 is in a parallel posture and is configured such that a sphere can pass through the upper part between the fan-shaped members 410. However, in the tilted state, the fan-shaped member 410 Therefore, the sphere flowing into the portion between the fan-shaped members 410 collides with the fan-shaped member 410 and is prevented from passing therethrough. In addition, in the tilted state, the inlet 435 is disposed between the fan-shaped members 410, so that a ball that has collided with the fan-shaped member 410 does not rebound (such as when vibrating in the vertical direction) and stays above the inlet 435. In this case, it is possible to drop the sphere to the inlet 435 as it is.

  With reference to FIG. 29, the operation | movement aspect of the delay floor device 400 by the difference in the position at the time of a ball | bowl falling from the fixed floor 430 to the front side is demonstrated. 29A is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 29B is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 taken along the line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29A. FIG. 29D is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 29D is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 taken along the line XXIXd-XXIXd in FIG. 29C.

  As shown in FIG. 29C and FIG. 29D, the delay floor device 400 is used to move the sphere when the sphere P11 riding on the delay floor device 400 falls to the front side of the fixed floor 430. Along the path (using the weight of the sphere), the fan-shaped member 410 operates. Therefore, a drive source such as a motor for operating the delay floor device 400 can be eliminated.

  29 (a) and 29 (b) illustrate a state in which the sphere P11 is falling from a position away from the fan-shaped member 410. In FIGS. 29 (c) and 29 (d), the sphere P11 is fan-shaped. A state in which the member 410 is falling from the center position of the member 410 to the front side of the fixed floor 430 is illustrated.

  Here, it is possible to configure the delay floor device 400 so that the delay floor device 400 moves each time the sphere passes over the delay floor device 400. In this case, the delay floor device 400 does not depend on how the sphere passes. There is a risk that the entry to the winning opening 64 will be delayed unnecessarily. In that case, the start of the fluctuation triggered by entering the winning hole 64 is delayed, which causes the player to be dissatisfied.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the ball P11 falls on the front side of the fixed floor 430 from the state in which the ball P11 is on the fan-shaped member 410 that is easy to enter the winning hole 64 as it is. When the delay floor device 400 is tilted in the leaning state, if the ball P11 falls from a position away from the fan-shaped member 410 that is unlikely to enter the winning opening 64 even if the ball P11 falls. The delay floor device 400 is configured to maintain the initial state. Therefore, the delay floor device 400 can be operated only when the falling ball P <b> 11 easily enters the winning opening 64.

  Accordingly, the delay floor device 400 operates until it is not necessary, and it is possible to avoid delaying the ball entering the winning port 64 unnecessarily, so that the ball entering the winning port 64 is triggered. Thus, it is possible to avoid delaying the start of the fluctuation and improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG.29 (d), by forming the chamfered part 411a in the front-end | tip of the fan-shaped member 410, while extending the front-end | tip of the fan-shaped member 410 from the front surface of the game board 13 in an initial state, it tilts. In the state, the game board 13 can be configured to be pulled back from the front surface. Accordingly, the ball can be dropped after being rolled to a position where it can easily fall into the winning opening 64 (front side of the front surface of the game board 13), so that the ball falling from the state of FIG. The probability of entering the winning opening 64 can be improved.

  With reference to FIG. 30, the relationship between the sphere P11 riding on the delay floor device 400 and the sphere P12 newly entered into the delay floor device 400 will be described. 30A is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG.

  30A and 30B show a state in which the sphere P12 is inserted from the left and right directions after the sphere P11 flows down to the front side of the fan-shaped member 410 and the fan-shaped member 410 is tilted. The

  A predetermined ball reaches the center of the floor portion arranged above the winning opening 64, and another ball rolls on the floor portion from the left and right directions and collides with the predetermined ball at the timing when it is about to fall to the winning port 64. However, a predetermined ball may come off from the winning opening 64, which is a source of lowering the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, when the ball P <b> 21 rolls at the timing when the ball P <b> 11 falls from the front side of the fan-shaped member 410, the delay floor device 400 is tilted, By colliding the sphere P12 and the fan-shaped member 410, the sphere P11 can be prevented from colliding with the sphere P12.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 30A, the gap formed by the tip portions of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 tapers in the traveling direction of the sphere P12 (rightward in FIG. 30A). Therefore, even if the ball P12 rolls at a position slightly shifted in the front-rear direction from the middle part of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 and collides with the fan-shaped member 410, the speed direction of the balls P12 is changed along the taper shape of the gap. It is possible to correct in the direction toward the intermediate position of the fan-shaped member 410. Therefore, the path of rolling of the sphere P12 can be limited, and the collision of the sphere P12 and the sphere P11 can be easily avoided.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31, delay ball device 400 in a state where two balls P11 and P12 enter the delay floor device 400 with an interval and the reciprocating motion is repeated and the velocity in the left-right direction converges to zero. The operation of will be described.

  FIG. 31A is a top view of the delay floor device 400, FIG. 31B is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 taken along the line XXXIB-XXXIb of FIG. 31A, and FIG. FIG. 31D is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 31D is a cross-sectional view of the delay floor device 400 taken along the line XXXId-XXXId in FIG.

  31A and 31B, the delay floor device 400 is in the initial state, and the state in which the sphere P11 rides on the front fan-shaped member 410 and the sphere P12 rides on the rear fan-shaped member 410 is shown. 31 (c) and 31 (d), the sphere P11 flows down from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), and the delay floor device 400 is tilted. .

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (d), in the sphere P12 riding on the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side, the sphere P11 flows down from the fan-shaped member 410 on the near side, and the delay floor device 400 is tilted. As a result, it is pushed back in the back direction (right direction in FIG. 31 (b)) along the inclination of the fan-like member 410 on the back side.

  Thereafter, the ball P11 falls and the delay floor device 400 returns to the initial state, so that the ball P12 can roll over the delay floor device 400 and above the front fan-shaped member 410 again. . That is, compared to the case where the balls P11 and P12 continuously enter the winning opening 64 from the state shown in FIG. 31A, the amount of the balls P11 and P12 that have entered the ball P12 is pushed back. The interval can be separated. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the overflow at the winning opening 64 due to the balls P11 and P12 entering the winning opening 64.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, two spheres P11 and P12 enter the delay floor device 400, and each of the spheres P11 and P12 moves in the front-rear direction in a state where the reciprocating motion is repeated and the lateral velocity converges to zero. The operation of the delay floor device 400 when arranged in series will be described.

  32A is a top view of the delay bed device 400, and FIG. 32B is a cross-sectional view of the delay bed device 400 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32A. FIG. 32B is a top view of the delay floor device 400, and FIG. 32D is a front view of the delay floor device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIId in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32A and FIG. 32B, when two balls P11 and P12 are arranged in a row, the ball P11 is on the front side of the extended arm portion 412 of the front fan-shaped member 410 ( In the state of being arranged in the left side of FIG. 32 (b), the sphere P12 is arranged near the middle position between the pair of front and rear fan-shaped members 410 (see FIG. 32 (b)).

  When the sphere P11 falls from the front side of the delay floor device 400 from this state and the delay floor device 400 is in a tilted state, the sphere P12 moves to the tip portion when the tip portion (arc portion) of the fan-like member 410 rises. Lifted. In the present embodiment, since the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410 has an arc shape, in the tilted state, the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410 that supports the sphere P12 is inclined downward as it goes outward in the left-right direction (FIG. 32D). reference). Therefore, the sphere P12 does not continue to be maintained at the left and right center of the fan-shaped member 410, but flows down to the left and right outside along the shape of the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410. Thereby, the sphere P12 flows from the fan-shaped member 410 into the inflow port 435. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball P12 from entering the winning opening 64 in a row with the ball P11.

  33 (a) and 33 (b) are cross-sectional views of the delay bed device 400 taken along line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa in FIG. 32 (c). In FIG. 33 (a), the state in which the spheres P11 and P12 are flowing down from the state shown in FIG. 32 (c) is shown in FIG. 33 (b), and the state shown in FIG. The state where P12 flows down and the ball P11 enters the winning opening 64 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), when the balls P11 and P12 flow down on the delay floor device 400, the ball P11 falls on the front side of the game board 13, and the ball P12 is delayed. It flows down the flow path 436. That is, the flow path of the two balls P11 and P12 is separated, and the delay floor device 400 is configured with a long flow path, so that the timing at which the two balls P11 and P12 win the winning opening 64 is shifted. Can do.

  Therefore, for example, even if it is configured in such a manner that information is acquired immediately after entering the winning opening 64 and variation is started on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), overflow occurs at the winning opening 64. Can be suppressed.

  That is, the period from the position of the ball P12 shown in FIG. 33B until the ball P12 flows down to the winning port 64 after flowing through the remaining part of the delay channel 436, the number of reserved balls in the winning port 64 is 4. By setting the period longer than the fluctuation period (the shortest fluctuation period) that can be easily selected, it is possible to suppress the overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 340 changes the posture only by the movement of the center of gravity has been described. However, in the delay device 2300 in the second embodiment, the locking device 2315 disposed in the main body member 2310 has a long hole. 2316 is configured to be supported by 2316 and maintain the attitude of the sorting device 2340. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 34A to FIG. 34C are partial front views of the delay device 2300 in the second embodiment. FIG. 34A shows a state in which the balls P21 and P22 arrive at the sorting device 2340 in the initial state in a row, and FIG. 34B shows a state in which the sorting device 2340 is changed by the weight of the ball P21. As shown in FIG. 34C, the ball P22 is released from the locking state by the locking device 2315, and the sorting device 2340 is returned to the initial state. The state where the movement has started is shown. In the present embodiment, the second adjustment device 350 is not disposed in the sorting device 2340, and the sorting device 2340 is biased toward the initial state by a spring mechanism (not shown).

  In the sorting device 2340, the first wall portion 2341 is configured to be approximately half the length of the second wall portion 342. Thereby, it can suppress that the ball | bowl P22 which flowed down from the 3rd groove | channel 313, and the 1st wall part 2341 collide, and can make the ball | bowl P22 not interfere with the reset operation | movement of the distribution apparatus 2340.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the locking device 2315 has a length that extends in the left-right direction at the lower wall portion of the side wall portion 312e on the wall portion on the back side of the main body member 2310 (the rear side in the vertical direction in FIG. 34). A flange member 2315a that is supported by the elongated hole 2316 that is slidable in the left-right direction and is rotatable, and a torsion spring 2315b that generates an elastic force that urges the flange member 2315a rightward and clockwise when viewed from the front. . In the present embodiment, the side wall portion 312e is formed with a space that is vacant in the lower end portion, and the flange member 2315a can pass through the space.

  The flange member 2315a includes a shaft portion 2315a1 supported by a long hole 2316 extending along the left-right direction in a wall portion formed between a pair of upper and lower third grooves 313, and the shaft portion 2315a1. And an abutting portion 2315a2 formed by penetrating through the side wall portion 312e and projecting to the upper right (upper right in FIG. 34) from the shaft portion 2315a1, and the shaft portion 2315a1 and the lower portion. A release portion 2315a3 configured to project inward of the third groove 313 on the side.

  The contact portion 2315a2 is disposed at a position that interferes with the movement locus of the tip convex portion 342a of the sorting device 2340. The shape of the abutting portion 2315a2 is such that the upper surface portion suddenly descends and slopes toward the right, and the lower surface portion has a shape along the left-right direction (a shape in surface contact with the tip convex portion 342a). When the state changes from the initial state to the changed state, the resistance applied to the sorting device 2340 can be suppressed and the moving speed can be improved. On the other hand, when the sorting device 2340 changes from the changed state to the initial state, The resistance applied to the sorting device 2340 can be increased, and the sorting device 2340 can be easily locked in the changed state.

  In addition, since the shaft portion 2315a1 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction along the long hole 2316, in the state immediately before the sorting device 2340 is changed (just before FIG. 34B), the flange member 2315a is moved. You can escape to the left. Thereby, compared with the case where the collar member 2315a is pivotally supported, the sorting device 2340 can be prevented from colliding with the locking device 2315 and meshing with each other to cause a malfunction.

  In the torsion spring 2315b, a torsion portion is wound around the shaft portion 2315a1, one end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 34 (a)) is locked to the main body member 2310, and the other end portion (FIG. 34 (a). ) The right end) is configured to be locked to the flange member 2315a.

  As shown in FIG. 34B, when the sorting device 2340 is changed by the weight of the sphere P21, the tip convex portion 342a is locked to the contact portion 2315a2. Thereby, the distribution device 2340 is maintained in the changed state. In this embodiment, as long as the locking device 2315 does not change its posture, the sorting device 2340 maintains the changed state.

  As shown in FIG. 34C, when the ball P22 flowing down the third groove 313 comes into contact with the release portion 2315a, and the posture of the hook member 2315a is changed counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the sorting device 2340 by the hook member 2315a is changed. Is released (the contact portion 2315a2 is disposed outside the movement locus of the sorting device 2340), and the sorting device 2340 can be returned to the initial state.

  According to this, in the state in which the urging force in the clockwise direction in the front view is always applied to the sorting device 2340, a time delay is formed from when the sorting device 2340 is changed to the changed state until it starts moving toward the initial state. can do. Therefore, the balls P21 and P22 can be reliably distributed to separate flow paths with a simple configuration.

  In FIG. 34, the case where the balls P21 and P22 flow down in series has been described. However, in light of the fact that the release of the locking device 2315a is caused by the flow of the ball P22, the effect of the present embodiment is the effect of the balls P21 and P22. This is achieved regardless of the distance to the sorting device 2340.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the delay device 300 changes due to the action of a sphere flowing down the upstream side of the detection port 312d has been described. However, the delay device 3300 in the third embodiment has a downstream side of the detection port 312d. It is configured in such a manner that the state changes due to the action of a sphere that flows down. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, in the present embodiment, the detection port 312d is arranged in a mode having an opening facing the left-right direction.

  35 (a), 35 (b), 35 (c), 36 (a), 36 (b) and 36 (c) show how the spheres P31 and P32 flow through the delay device 3300. It is a partial front view of the delay device 3300 in 3rd Embodiment illustrated in a series.

  FIG. 35A shows a state in which the stopping device 3340 is in the initial state and the balls P31 and P32 continuously enter the winning opening 64 and reach the stopping device 3340. FIG. FIG. 35A shows a state where the stop device 3340 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 35A, and FIG. 35C shows a state where the stop device 3340 is changed.

  FIG. 36A shows a state in which the previous ball P31 passes through the detection port 312d in the left-right direction and contacts the maintenance device 3360 to change the posture of the maintenance device 3360. In FIG. FIG. 36 (c) shows a state in which the stopping device 3340 is changed in posture from the changed state to the initial state and a gap is formed between the second groove 3312 so that only one sphere can pass. The state where P32 flows down toward the detection port 312d is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the delay device 3300 includes a main body member 3310 having a flow-down path for guiding a ball that has entered the winning port 64 to the detection port 312d, and a ball that flows down inside the main body member 3310. The stop device 3340 whose state is changed by the action, and when the stop device 3340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 35C), the state is maintained and the posture is changed by the action of the sphere that has passed through the detection port 312d. Accordingly, a maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state of the stop device 3340 is mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the main body member 3310 includes a first groove 3311 that forms a downwardly inclined flow path and guides a ball that has entered from the winning port 64 to a position vertically above the detection port 312d. It mainly includes a second groove 3312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311 to the detection port 312d, and a post-detection flow path 3313 for guiding a sphere that has passed through the detection port 312d. The first groove 3311 and the second groove 3312 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side. When the open portion is closed to the game board 13 in the assembled state, a passage through which the ball flows down is provided. It is formed.

  The second groove 3312 has a side wall 312e extending to the detection port 312d, and an accommodation recess 3312f configured as a depression having a size capable of accommodating half a sphere between the contact wall 312a and the side wall 312e. Prepare.

  In addition, a receiving wall portion 3312c is provided on the opposite side of the side wall portion 312e, and an accommodation concave portion 3312c1 is recessed in the receiving wall portion 3312c toward the rear. The accommodation recess 3312c1 is disposed in a positional relationship in which the magnet portion 3346 can be accommodated when the stopping device 3340 is in a changed state (see FIG. 35A).

  The accommodation recess 3312f extends along a straight line whose lower wall surface for receiving the ball passes through the center hole 345 of the stop device 3340. Thereby, the direction in which the sphere P32 waiting in the housing recess 3312f starts to flow down due to gravity can be set to the direction toward the stop device 3340. For this reason, when the sphere P32 is ready to flow down, the sphere P32 can flow smoothly.

  The post-detection flow path 3313 is a flow path through which the sphere that has passed through the detection port 312d flows, and is disposed immediately below the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360, and a bearing portion 3313a that supports the shaft portion 3361a of the maintenance device 3360. And an opening 3313b which is an opening configured to allow the contact portion 3363 to enter and exit, and a protruding body from the upper wall of the post-detection flow path 3313 toward the lower surface of the main body bar 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 and the main body bar A locking portion 3313c that locks the movement of 3361 and a delay flow path 3313d extending from the detection port 312d to the opening 3313b are provided.

  The stopping device 3340 does not include the second adjusting device 350 configured to be movable in the position of the center of gravity described in the first embodiment, and the center of gravity G3 is a line extending the second wall portion 342 and the stopping device 3340. It is fixedly arranged at the intersection with the circumference. In the second wall portion 342, the formation of the tip convex portion 342a is omitted.

  Stop device 3340 includes magnet portion 3346 that extends from first wall portion 341 of stop device 3340 toward the opposite side of second wall portion 342 and is made of a magnetic material.

  The maintenance device 3360 is a pendulum-like device that is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3313a, and a main body rod 3361 that is a rod-like member having a shaft portion 3361a that is pivotally supported by the bearing portion 3313a at an intermediate position. The main body bar 3361 is disposed at an end portion of the main body bar 3361 adjacent to the receiving wall portion 312c and is composed of a magnetic material, and the main body bar 3361 is disposed at an end portion on the opposite side of the magnet portion 3362. It is mainly provided with a contact portion 3363 that is disposed at a position where it can enter the post-detection flow path 3313 due to a change and is disposed so as to be able to contact a flowing ball.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35A, the posture in which the main body bar 3361 is supported by the locking portion 3313c is the initial state of the maintenance device 3360. That is, in the initial state, the magnet portion 3362 is disposed facing the housing recess 3312 c 1, the contact portion 3363 protrudes to the inside of the post-detection flow path 3313, and the weight of the contact portion 3363 causes the maintenance device 3360. Posture is maintained.

  Note that the end surface of the magnet portion 3362 is a straight line drawn perpendicularly from the end surface, and a portion above the straight line is omitted with a straight line passing through the shaft portion 3361a as a boundary.

  That is, the portion of the end surface portion that is pulled vertically from the end surface and passes through the straight line passing through the shaft portion 3361a is closest to the receiving wall portion 3312c in the initial state, and the upper portion thereof (the main body bar 3361 is viewed from the front). Since the portion that moves close to the receiving wall portion 3312c by rotating counterclockwise is omitted, the same portion is closest to the receiving wall portion 3312c even after the maintenance device 3360 changes its posture from the initial state. (All parts of the end face of the magnet portion 3362 are configured to be away from the receiving wall portion 3312c).

  Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 35C, the maintaining device 3360 is changed in posture by the action of the sphere from the state where the magnet unit 3346 of the stopping device 3340 is close to the magnet unit 3362 of the maintaining device 3360 and the magnetic force in the attracting direction is generated. Thus, the end surface of the magnet portion 3362 can be separated from the magnet portion 3346 of the stopping device 3340.

  Further, the magnet unit 3362 is not moved in a direction perpendicular to the attracting surface, but is separated from the attracting surface while being inclined, so that the magnet units 3346 and 3362 are attracted with a weak force. It can be canceled.

  A change in the state of the delay device 3300 when the balls P31 and P32 pass through the main body member 3310 will be described in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 35A, when the balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64, the balls P31 and P32 reach the stopping device 3340 through the first groove 3311 and the second groove 3312. In the present embodiment, since the space between the first wall portion 341 and the second wall portion 342 of the stop device 3340 is large enough to accommodate one sphere, only the previous sphere P31 is accommodated, The sphere P32 is maintained outside the stop device 3340.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the stop device 3340 rotates from the initial state by the weight of the previous sphere P31, and the subsequent sphere P32 is pushed by the outer end portion of the second wall portion 342 into the receiving recess 3312f. The left part is accommodated. Since the position accommodated in the accommodation recess 3312f is the lowermost position on the upstream side of the stop device 3340 of the second groove 3312, the ball P32 is maintained at the position shown in FIG. The

  As shown in FIG. 35 (c), in a state where the ball P31 is caused to flow down to the detection port 312d, the first wall portion 341 and the receiving wall portion 3312c of the stopping device 3340 come into contact with each other, and the magnet portion 3346 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 3312c1. Is done. In this state, the magnet unit 3346 comes close to the magnet unit 3362 of the maintaining device 3360 and generates a magnetic force in the attracting direction, whereby the state of the stopping device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. Therefore, even when the ball P31 flows down to the outside of the stopping device 3340, the ball P32 remains stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), after the previous ball P31 passes through the delay flow path 3313d, it comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, whereby the main body bar 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 rotates, and the magnet portion 3362 Separated from the magnet portion 3346.

  As a result, the magnetic force acting on the stopping device 3340 is sharply reduced, and the force for stopping the rotation of the stopping device 3340 is released. Thus, the gravity center G3 of the stopping device 3340 is moved downward by the action of gravity. The stop device 3340 starts to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  In this embodiment, the distance between the shaft portion 3361a and the contact portion 3363 is increased several times (about 5 times) compared to the distance between the shaft portion 3361a and the magnet portion 3362. The maintenance device 3360 can be rotated with a small load of the weight of the sphere P31.

  Further, since the moving width on the magnet portion 3362 side is made smaller than the moving width on the abutting portion 3363 side with respect to the shaft portion 3361a, the magnet portion 3362 is positioned by the vibration transmitted to the game board 13. It is possible to prevent the posture of the stop device 3340 from being changed due to a lack of magnetic force applied to the stop device 3340 due to a shift.

  As shown in FIG. 36B, the maintaining device 3360 returns to the initial state by the weight of the contact portion 3363 when the ball P31 passes and the ball P31 and the contact portion 3363 are separated.

  As shown in FIG. 36B, the stop device 3340 rotates in such a manner that the opening area of the portion facing the sphere P32 accommodated in the accommodation recess 3312f gradually increases in the return operation from the change state to the initial state. To do. That is, the ball P32 can be accommodated in the stop device 3340 before the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state. Thereby, for example, when two spheres are accumulated on the upstream side of the stopping device 3340, both of the two spheres can be prevented from flowing into the stopping device 3340. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the stop device 3340 from clogging and causing an operation failure or a reduction in the operation speed.

  As shown in FIG. 36C, the sphere P32 accommodated in the accommodation recess 3312f is accommodated in the stop device 3340, the stop device 3340 is rotated by the weight of the sphere P32, and the sphere P32 flows down to the detection port 312d. Is done.

  As described above, even when a plurality of balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64, the previous ball P31 changes the posture of the maintenance device 3360 and passes through a position where the state of the stop device 3340 is released. The subsequent flow of the sphere P32 can be stopped. In the present embodiment, the sphere P31 is designed to pass through the delay flow path 3313d over 3 seconds. Therefore, after the sphere P31 passes through the detection port 312d, the change starts and then the sphere P32 is at least 3 seconds. Can be prevented from passing through the detection port 312d.

  Accordingly, when the shortest fluctuation period (fluctuation period that can be easily selected when the number of reserved balls is 4) that can be acquired by entering a ball into the winning opening 64 is 3 seconds, FIG. 35A shows. As described above, even when the balls P31 and P32 enter the winning port 64 in succession (entered at intervals shorter than 3 seconds), after the variation started by passing the ball P31 through the detection port 312d is completed. The state in which the sphere P32 passes through the detection port 312d can be configured. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an overflow from occurring when balls enter the winning opening 64 continuously.

  Further, since it is possible to secure a period from when the ball P31 passes the detection port 312d to when the posture of the maintenance device 3360 is changed, the overflow is larger than when the posture maintenance of the stop device 3340 is released upstream of the detection port 312d. Can be reliably prevented.

  For example, when the posture of the maintenance device 3360 is changed using the sphere before passing through the detection port 312d, the operation of the stop device 3340 is performed in order to secure a space between the sphere passing through the detection port 312d and the subsequent sphere. It must be designed to be slow. That is, it is necessary to make a space between the spheres in a period until the stopping device 3340 returns from the changed state to the initial state. If the operating speed of the stopping device 3340 is changed due to deterioration over time, overflow may not be prevented.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, only the sphere operates in the delay device 3300 after the sphere passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere comes into contact with the maintaining device 3360. Thus, the operation timing of the stopping device 3340 can be managed based on the relationship between the sphere and the fixed flow path.

  In this embodiment, since the period (3 seconds) required for the fluctuation has elapsed before the sphere reaches the maintenance device 3360, the overflow is caused regardless of the period until the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state. Can be prevented. In other words, whether the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state over 10 seconds or returns to the initial state after 0.5 seconds, it is possible to prevent an overflow from occurring at the winning hole 64 regardless of this.

  In addition, compared with a case where the stopping device 3340 is electrically operated and fixed, the period from the time when the ball P31 passes the winning port 64 to the time when the ball passes through the detection port 312d is kept short, and after the ball P31. Only the ball P32 that enters the ball can be stopped, and it is possible to prevent the period from the time when the previous ball P31 passes through the winning opening 64 from the start of the fluctuation from being extended. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable (for example, the feeling that the player may have done something wrong because the ball does not start even though the ball entered the winning hole 64). it can.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere is decelerated by the action of the protruding portion 321a1 of the delay device 300 has been described. However, the delay device 4300 in the fourth embodiment decelerates the sphere by the sprocket 4340 that separates the sphere at equal intervals. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  37 (a), 37 (b), 37 (c), 38 (a), 38 (b), and 38 (c) show how the spheres P41, P42, etc. flow through the delay device 4300. It is a front view of the delay device 4300 in 4th Embodiment illustrated in time series. FIG. 37 (a) shows a state where the sprocket 4340 is in an initial state and the balls P41 and 42 continuously enter the winning opening 64 and reach the sprocket 4340. In FIG. 37 (b), FIG. 37A shows a state where the sprocket 4340 has rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 37A, and FIG. 37C shows a state where the magnet member 4351 of the magnet device 4350 is disposed at the locking position. FIG. 38 (a) illustrates a state in which the sprocket 4340 is rotating with the weight of the sphere P42, and FIG. 38 (b) illustrates a state immediately before the sphere P42 enters the detection port 312d. Then, the state in the middle of the sprocket 4340 rotating clockwise when viewed from the front and the magnet member 4351 of the magnet device 4350 moving toward the initial position is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the delay device 4300 includes a main body member 4310 having a flow-down path that guides the ball that has entered the winning port 64 to the detection port 312d, and a ball that flows down inside the main body member 4310. A sprocket 4340 whose state is changed by the action and a magnet device 4350 having a magnet member 4351 configured to be relatively movable along the rotation locus of the sprocket 4340 are mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, the main body member 4310 includes a first groove 3311, a second groove 4312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311 to the detection port 312d, and a second groove 4312 thereof. A columnar shaft bar 4313 extending along the front-rear direction in the right portion of the groove 4312 is mainly provided. The first groove 3311 and the second groove 4312 have a groove shape having an open part on the game board 13 side. When the open part is closed to the game board 13 in the assembled state, a passage through which the ball flows down is provided. It is formed.

  The 2nd groove | channel 4312 is set as the structure remove | excluding the receiving wall part 3312c (refer Fig.35 (a)) from the 2nd groove | channel 3312 in 3rd Embodiment. Therefore, the contact wall 312a, the recessed portion 312b, the detection port 312d, the side wall portion 312e, and the housing recess 3312f are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  The sprocket 4340 is a gear-shaped member that rotates by the weight of a sphere flowing down the main body member 4310, and a disk-shaped disk member 4341 that is rotatably supported by a shaft rod 4313 at the center position, and its circle It mainly includes an accommodation wall portion 4342 that extends to the front side of the plate member 4341 and is formed so as to accommodate a sphere in a gap between the walls.

  Since the disk member 4341 is disposed at a position that is in the same position as the wall portion on the back side of the main body member 4310 (the wall portion on the back side in the vertical direction in FIG. 37A), it flows down the inside of the disk member 4341. The ball to be passed passes through the front side of the disk member 4341.

  Further, the disk member 4341 has a striped magnetic pole (the area between the plate-like parts 4342a to 4342e is divided into three equal parts along the outer peripheral surface, the central part is an N pole, and the outer part is an S pole. A magnet portion 4341a having a striped magnetic pole). The magnet portion 4341a and the magnet device 4350 interact with each other to adjust the rotational speed of the sprocket 4340.

  Note that a triangular mark M is formed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral position of the disk member 4341 in order to easily determine that the disk member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 have moved relative to each other.

  The accommodating wall portion 4342 is a plate-like portion that extends radially outward from the center of the disk member 4341 and prevents the passage of a sphere in the circumferential direction, and is equidistant (72 °). It is composed of five plate-like parts 4342a to 4342e arranged at intervals. Each gap between the plate-like portions 4342a to 4342e has a width that can accommodate only one sphere. The outer peripheral surfaces of the plate-like portions 4342a to 4342e (the radially outer peripheral surface of the sprocket 4340) are formed in an arc shape that is formed coaxially with the central axis of the disc member 4341.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a) as an example, the first plate-like portion 4342a is disposed at a position where the ball P41 rides, and from there, the second plate-like portion 4342b and the third plate-like portion are sequentially clockwise. 4342c, the 4th plate-shaped part 4342d, and the 5th plate-shaped part 4342e are arrange | positioned.

  The magnet device 4350 is formed of a magnetic material and is formed in an arc shape whose diameter is slightly longer than the diameter of the outer peripheral surface of the disc member 4341 of the sprocket 4340, and a shaft bar 4313 via a rotating arm (not shown). And a circular arc wall portion extending from the main body member 4310 at a position spaced a predetermined distance below the disk member 4341 as a circular arc shaped wall surface along the shape of the lower surface of the magnetic member 4351. 4352 and a stopper portion 4353 projecting toward the magnet member 4351 at the end of the arc wall portion 4352 opposite to the side close to the main body member 4310.

  The magnet member 4351 has a striped magnetic pole (a striped magnetic pole in which the arc region is divided into three equal parts, the central part is the S pole, and the outer part is the N pole) on the inner circumference side of the arc shape. The sprocket 4340 is arranged with a slight gap from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 4341 and is corrected in position with respect to the magnetic pole of the disk member 4341.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 37A (the state before the weight of the sphere P41 is applied to the sprocket 4340), the center position of the region between the plate-like portions 4342a to 4342e and the center position of the arc of the magnet member 4351 Is maintained at the position where it matches

  The magnet member 4351 has one end (the left end in FIG. 37 (a)) abutting against the outer surface of the main body member 4310 at the initial position shown in FIG. 37 (a), and the engagement shown in FIG. 37 (c). The other end (the upper end in FIG. 37 (c)) abuts against the stopper portion 4353 at the stop position (the position rotated counterclockwise by 72 ° from the initial position about the shaft 4313).

  The arc wall portion 4352 is a wall portion arranged outside the magnet member 4351, and is arranged at a position where a gap is left between the magnet member 4351 and the magnet member 4351 when the magnet member 4351 is attracted to the disk member 4341. Is done.

  For example, even if the game board 13 vibrates for some reason and an impact is applied to the magnet member 4351, even if the adsorption of the disk member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 is temporarily released, the magnet member 4351 remains in an arc shape. Since it is supported by the wall portion 4352, the magnet member 4351 can be prevented from being largely displaced.

  The stopper portion 4353 is disposed at a position where the movement of the magnet member 4351 is blocked. In the present embodiment, the magnet member 4351 and the stopper portion 4353 come into contact with each other in the locked state in which the magnet member 4351 is rotated by a predetermined angle (72 ° in the present embodiment) from the initial position shown in FIG. The ball P41 flows down to the detection port 312d in this locked state (see FIG. 37C).

  A change in the state of the delay device 4300 when the balls P41 and P42 pass through the main body member 4310 will be described in time series.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, when the balls P41 and P42 enter the winning opening 64, the balls P41 and P42 reach the sprocket 4340 through the first groove 3311 and the second groove 4312. In the present embodiment, since the space between the first plate portion 4342a and the second plate portion 4342b of the sprocket 4340 is large enough to accommodate one sphere, only the previous sphere P41 is accommodated, and the rear The sphere P42 is maintained outside the sprocket 4340.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the sprocket 4340 rotates from the initial state (see FIG. 37 (a)) by the weight of the previous sphere P41, and the subsequent sphere P42 is pushed to the tip of the second plate-like portion 4342b. Thus, the left side portion is accommodated in the accommodating recess 3312f. Since the position accommodated in the accommodation recess 3312f is the lowest end position of the second groove 4312 on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340, the sphere P42 is maintained at the position shown in FIG. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (b), the magnet member 4351 moves integrally with the disk member 4341 of the sprocket 4340. Therefore, the weight of the magnet member 4351 is loaded on the disk member 4341 as a rotational resistance.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (c), when the sprocket 4340 is rotated 72 ° counterclockwise from the initial state (when the ball P31 can flow down to the detection port 312d), the magnet member 4351, the stopper portion 4353, and Abut (the magnet member 4351 is disposed at the locking position).

  Therefore, when the sprocket 4340 further rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the magnet member 4351 is maintained at the locking position, and only the sprocket 4340 is rotated. In this case, a magnetic force acts between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351, and the magnetic force is added to the rotation resistance of the sprocket 4340.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (c), the sprocket 4340 is rotated by 72 ° from the initial state in a state where the sphere P41 flows down to the detection port 312d while rubbing against the side wall portion 312e and the first plate-like portion 4342a. It becomes. That is, the sprocket 4340 is adjusted to a predetermined posture by passing the sphere. Since the shape of the sphere is precisely made, the sprocket 4340 can be reliably rotated by 72 ° using the accuracy of the shape of the sphere.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the first plate-like portion 4342a is inclined downward so as to press the sphere P41 against the side wall portion 312e, so that the speed of the sphere P41 is directed toward the side wall portion 312e. It is possible to prevent the first plate-like portion 4342a from rotating too much due to the momentum of the sphere P41.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37C, the sphere P42 enters the sprocket 4340, and after the sphere P41 is sent toward the detection port 312d, the sprocket 4340 is rotated by the weight of the sphere P42.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when the sprocket 4340 rotates with the weight of the sphere P42, as shown by the position of the mark M, the disc member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 of the sprocket 4340 move relative to each other. Therefore, a magnetic force generated between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is loaded on the sprocket 4340 as a rotational resistance.

  FIG. 38A shows a state where the sphere P43 and the sphere P44 enter the winning opening 64 following the sphere P42 and stay on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340.

  In this embodiment, the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 by the magnetic force applied between the magnet member 4351 and the sprocket 4340 is much larger than the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 due to the weight of the magnet member 4351. The magnet member 4351 is configured in such a manner that the magnetic force generated is increased while the weight is reduced.

  Thereby, for example, while the period from the state shown in FIG. 37A to the state shown in FIG. 37C is 0.5 seconds, the state shown in FIG. ) Can be 5 seconds (the time required to rotate the sprocket 4340 by a predetermined angle can be changed).

  In this embodiment, since the period from the state shown in FIG. 37C to the state shown in FIG. 38A is set to 5 seconds, for example, the sphere P41 passes through the detection port 312d. Thus, when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 becomes four and the variation selected at that time is a variation for 3 seconds, the ball P42 passes through the detection port 312d after the variation is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an overflow from occurring at the prize winning port 64 when the ball P42 passes through the detection port 312d.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, when a plurality of spheres P43 and spheres P44 stay on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340, the load applied to the sprocket 4340 from the spheres P43 and P44 is the outer periphery of the storage wall portion 4342. Due to the effect of the surface shape (arc), the load is directed in the direction (radial direction) toward the shaft rod 4313.

  Therefore, the load applied from the sphere P43 and the sphere P44 in the rotational direction of the sprocket 4340 can be limited to the load caused by the friction between the sphere P43 and the sprocket 4340, and is compared with the weight of the staying sphere P43 and sphere P44. Thus, the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 can be reduced.

  38B shows a state in which the sphere P42 is sent to the detection port 312d and the sphere P43 enters the sprocket 4340 (from the initial state shown in FIG. 37A, the sprocket 4340 is 144 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The rotated state) is illustrated.

  When the sprocket 4340 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 38B, the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 are moved relative to each other as in the case where the sprocket 4340 is rotated by the weight of the sphere P42. This is the same when the sphere P44 after the sphere P43 is accommodated in the sprocket 4340 and the sprocket 4340 rotates.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, even when the number of balls that enter the winning port 64 is four or more (regardless of the number of balls), the interval at which each ball is sent to the detection port 312d is constant. The interval until the ball P41 entering the winning port 64 as the first ball passes through the detection port 312d is compared with the pitching interval between the balls released by the sprocket 4340. It can be shortened.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable (for example, since the ball does not start when the ball enters the winning hole 64, but the player feels that something is wrong). .

  As shown in FIG. 38 (c), after the ball P44 (see FIG. 38 (b)) is sent toward the detection port 312d, the next ball (the ball entering the winning port 64) is applied to the sprocket 4340. When not riding, the sprocket 4340 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front due to the weight of the magnet member 4351.

  In this embodiment, since the magnet member 4351 is composed of a light member, the rotational speed of the sprocket 4340 is reduced, and the period until the magnet member 4351 returns from the locking position to the initial position is 5 seconds.

  Therefore, the timing at which the sphere P41 shown in FIG. 37 (a) passes through the detection port 312d and the sprocket 4340 further rotates from the state of FIG. 38 (c) and immediately after the magnet member 4351 is placed at the initial position, The interval from the timing at which the ball that enters the ball passes through the detection port 312d is 5 seconds or longer. 5 seconds is a period longer than the shortest fluctuation period (3 seconds) that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is four.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent an overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64 when the ball passes through the sprocket 4340 immediately after the sprocket 4340 returns to the initial state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 38 (c), the relative position between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is not changed in appearance from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a). Compared to the state shown in (a), the magnet member 4351 is disposed at a position relatively moved by 72 ° about the shaft rod 4313.

  In the present embodiment, each time the ball passes through the second groove 4312 in a state where the magnet member 4351 is disposed at the locking position, the sprocket 4340 is between the plate-like portions of the housing wall portion 4342 with respect to the magnet member 4351. The position is shifted by an angle corresponding to one gap (ie, 72 °).

  Therefore, the relative movement between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is, for example, a relative movement in which the first plate-like portion 4342a moves to the position of the second plate state 4342b, and after the relative movement, The overall shape of the magnet member 4351 is the same as before the relative movement.

  Therefore, the overall shape of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 after the sphere is discharged from the sprocket 4340 can be made unchanged regardless of the number of spheres passing through the second groove 4312. It is not necessary to provide a device for moving the magnet member 4351 to the position of the mark M of the sprocket 4340 when the inflow of the sphere into the base has disappeared for a certain period (shown in FIG. 38C). Thus, even if the relative positional relationship between the mark M and the magnet member 4351 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 37A, it can be left as it is.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46. In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the ball flowing down the second groove 3312 is also discharged through the post-detection flow path 3313 after passing through the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the change state. The delay device 5300 is configured in such a manner that the sphere flowing down the second groove 5312 flows down the continuous passage groove 5314 when the stop device 3340 is in the change state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 39 is a partial front view of a delay device 5300 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 39, the balls P51 to P54 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is changed. Further, the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the delay device 5300 are configured as symmetrical devices with the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the third embodiment, and therefore the same reference numerals as those in the third embodiment The description overlapping with the description in the third embodiment is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the delay device 5300 includes a main body member 5310 having a flow path for guiding a ball that has entered the first winning port 64 to the detection port 312d, and an action of the ball that flows down inside the main body member 5310. The stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the above, and when the stop device 3340 enters the change state (see FIG. 39), the state is maintained and stopped as the posture changes due to the action of the ball that has passed through the detection port 312d. A maintenance device 3360 that releases the maintenance of the state of the device 3340 and a stopping device 5500 that acts on a sphere flowing down a continuous passage groove 5314 to be described later and stops the sphere are mainly provided. In order to facilitate understanding of the stopping device 5500, only the movable plate portion 5510 is shown, and the other configurations are omitted, and the movable plate portion 5510 is visible through the stopping portion 5314b in a front view. The part is illustrated by a solid line, and the other part is illustrated by a hidden line (broken line). Further, the rotational resistance of the stopping device 3340 and the position of the center of gravity G3 are set in such a manner that it takes about 1 second for the stopping device 3340 to change from the change state to the initial state.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the main body member 5310 constitutes a downwardly inclined flow path and guides a ball entered from the first winning port 64 to a position vertically above the detection port 312d, and its first groove 5311. From the middle position of the second groove 5312, the second groove 5312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, the post-detection flow path 5313 for guiding the sphere passing through the detection port 312d, and the second groove 5312. And a continuous passage groove 5314 formed as a groove branched to the side (right side in FIG. 39).

  The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the post-detection flow path 5313 and the continuous passage groove 5314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is formed in the game board 13 in the assembled state. By being closed, a passage through which the sphere flows down is formed.

  Note that the first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, and the post-detection flow path 5313 are symmetrical to the configuration of the same name (the first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, and the post-detection flow path 3313) in the third embodiment. Therefore, the description overlapping with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

  The second groove 5312 is disposed to face the recessed portion 312b (in other words, a wall portion that extends to the front side and extends in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left end portion of the recessed portion 312b). The part 312e extends to the detection port 312d. Between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e, a continuous passage groove 5314 that forms a branch passage through which a ball can be sent is disposed.

  The position where the continuous passage groove 5314 is connected to the second groove 5312 is formed to be the same as the position where the accommodation recess 3312f is disposed in the third embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a sphere that has reached the stopping device 3340 when the stopping device 3340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 35A) (among the spheres P51 to P54, the sphere that entered at the head, ie, the sphere P51). Is guided to the detection port 312d while changing the stop device 3340 to the changed state. When the stop device 3340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 39), the ball that has reached the stop device 3340 (the ball that has entered after the follow-up), Spheres P52 to P54) flow down the continuous passage groove 5314.

  In addition, a receiving wall portion 3312c is provided on the opposite side of the side wall portion 312e, and an accommodation concave portion 3312c1 is recessed in the receiving wall portion 3312c toward the rear. The housing recess 3312c1 is disposed in a positional relationship in which the magnet portion 3346 can be housed when the stopping device 3340 is in a changed state (see FIG. 39).

  The post-detection flow path 5313 has the same configuration as the post-detection flow path 3313 of the third embodiment and is formed in a bilaterally symmetric shape. In other words, the post-detection flow path 5313 is a flow path through which the sphere that has passed through the detection port 312d flows, and is disposed directly below the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360, and is a bearing that supports the shaft portion 3361a of the maintenance device 3360. A protrusion 3313a, an opening 3313b which is an opening configured to be able to enter and leave the contact portion 3363, and a protruding portion from the upper wall of the post-detection flow path 5313 toward the lower surface of the main body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360. A locking portion 3313c for locking the movement of the main body bar 3361 and a delay channel 3313d extending from the detection port 312d to the opening 3313b are provided.

  Similar to the third embodiment, the delay flow path 3313d is designed to have a length that allows a sphere flowing down under the action of gravity to pass over at least 3 seconds. Therefore, the stopping device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state for at least 3 seconds, and the balls that have entered during that time can be continuously entered into the continuous passage groove 5314.

  In this case, the stopping device 3340 includes a timing at which the state changes toward the change state due to the flow of the ball P51 that has entered the first winning opening 64 (the start of a period during which the ball can be introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314), and a change state. The period for maintaining

  The period during which this change state is maintained (at least 3 seconds after the stop device 3340 changes state) and the time for the stop device 3340 to return from the change state to the initial state (in this embodiment, about 1 second) are added together. During this period, it becomes easy for the ball that has entered the first winning port 64 to pass continuously through the second detection port 5314c disposed downstream of the continuous passage groove 5314.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a plurality of balls P51 and P52 enter the first winning opening 64 without requiring a transition of the gaming state, they are the same as the detection opening 312d and the second detection opening 5314c. Switching between a state where it is easy to pass (a state where alternate winnings are made) and a state where it is easier to pass through the second detection port 5314c than in the detection port 312d (a state where the player continuously enters the second detection port 5314c). Can do.

  Generally, the ball launch interval allowed for the pachinko machine 10 is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, so the upper limit of balls that can normally enter within 3 seconds is 4,5. Therefore, in the present embodiment, description will be made assuming that the upper limit of the number of balls that enter within 3 seconds is 5 (ignoring the possibility of entering after the sixth ball).

  The continuous passage groove 5314 is connected to the second groove 5312 and is introduced to the introduction groove 5314a into which the sphere is first introduced, and is connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a and a predetermined number of spheres (one sphere in this embodiment). A stop portion 5314b that stops, a through hole that is disposed directly below the stop portion 5314b and through which a sphere can pass, and that is connected to an intermediate position between the introduction groove 5314a and a second detection port 5314c that detects the passage of the sphere. A branch flow path 5314d disposed on the back side of the introduction groove 5314a, and a third detection port 5314e that is provided in the branch flow path 5314d and has a through-hole through which a sphere can pass and detects the passage of the sphere. Prepare mainly.

  The introduction groove 5314a is a groove inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front as a whole, bent near the lower end position, and extended vertically downward, and assuming that a plurality of spheres stay from the lower end, An upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is formed in the region on the back side of the third sphere counted from the lower end so that the sphere can pass therethrough and the upper end of the branch flow path 5314d is connected.

  As described above, the upper end of the branch flow path 5314d is connected to the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is detected by being guided by the branch flow path 5314d and passing through the third detection port 5314e. Note that the branch flow path 5314d is illustrated by a hidden line (broken line) in order to facilitate understanding that the branch flow path 5314d is disposed on the back side of the introduction groove 5314a.

  On the other hand, the sphere that has flowed down the introduction groove 5314a is detected by passing through the second detection port 5314c via the stopping portion 5314b. Accordingly, the sphere introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314 is guided to a sphere discharge path (not shown) after being detected at either the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e.

  In the present embodiment, the length of the introduction groove 5314a is set in such a manner that it takes at least two seconds when the sphere flows down through the introduction groove 5314a by the action of gravity. Therefore, it is possible to reliably shift the passage timing between the sphere P51 that passes vertically through the stop device 3340 and passes through the detection port 312d, and the sphere P52 that flows down the introduction groove 5314a and passes through the second detection port 5314c. it can.

  For example, when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (FIG. 35A), if two balls (spheres P51 and P52) enter the first winning opening 64 in succession, the leading ball P51 is the stop device. While changing the state of 3340 from the initial state to the changed state, it flows down vertically and passes through the detection port 312d immediately after changing the state of the stopping device 3340. On the other hand, the follower ball P52 rolls on the arc wall portion 343 of the stop device 3340 and is introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314, and flows down through the introduction groove 5314a for at least 2 seconds, and then the second detection port 5314c. Pass through.

  In this embodiment, the introduction groove 5314a has a longer flow path length than the delay flow path 3313d (see FIG. 39), but compared with the time required for the sphere to pass through the delay flow path 3313d. The time required for the sphere to pass through the introduction groove 5314a is shorter. This is because the inclination angle of the introduction groove 5314a with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the delay flow path 3313d with respect to the horizontal plane.

  The time required for the stop device 3340 to change from the initial state to the change state is set to be negligibly short (about 0.1 second) until the ball whose state has been changed by the stop device 3340 passes through the detection port 312d. When the length of the side wall 312e is set in such a manner that the time required for the sphere P3 is extremely short (about 0.1 second), the timing at which the sphere P51 is detected by passing through the detection port 312d, and the sphere P52 The timing detected by passing through the detection port 5314c can be shifted.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the path length from the first winning port 64 to the second detecting port 5314c is longer than the path length from the first winning port 64 to the detecting port 312d. Set long. As a result, the ball that has entered the first winning port 64 visually passes through the first winning port 64 more than the time required to pass through the detecting port 312d after passing through the first winning port 64. It can be determined that it takes a longer time to pass through the second detection port 5314c.

  In the present embodiment, when a ball that has entered the first winning port 64 passes through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c (also referred to as starting winning or entering a ball, the same applies to other embodiments). Then, using this as a trigger, the first symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the first special symbol (first symbol), and the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e, so that the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. Fluctuation display is executed. In other words, after the ball has entered the first winning port 64, the display is still variable until it passes through the detection sensor (detection port 312d, first winning port switch not shown in the first embodiment, etc.). Is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, a ball enters the second winning opening 640 (start winning prize), a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a big win for the second special symbol due to the turning on of the winning opening switch, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. In addition, this display is executed in the same manner in other embodiments unless otherwise described in detail.

  Here, a difference (common to the first embodiment) between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the present embodiment will be described. That is, when a ball is won at the first winning opening 64 (in the case of a lottery winning the first special symbol) and when a ball is winning at the second winning port 640 (in the case of a big winning lottery of the second special symbol). Thus, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both a low probability state and a high probability state. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is the first winning slot 64 when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 (the jackpot of the second special symbol). It is set higher than the case where the ball wins (first special symbol jackpot).

  In the following, the detection port where the detection sensor is arranged may be simply referred to as a detection port (or a winning port, a winning port, etc.) (the description of the detection sensor may be omitted). The description that the lottery is performed (variation is executed) due to passing through the mouth (or winning entrance, entrance entrance, etc.) is omitted, and the ball is simply detected by the detection entrance (or winning entrance, It may be briefly explained when it passes the entrance).

  Up to four pieces of data of the first symbol acquired at the timing when the sphere passes the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c can be stored (in the four reserved areas in order), Can independently acquire the data of the second symbol at the timing when the sphere passes through the third detection port 5314e.

  In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate the number of suspensions among the number of passes of the first winning port 64 (the inner detecting port 312d and the second detecting port 5314c) and the second winning port 640. As a result (at the same time), the first symbol hold mark is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a decorative display indicating the number of hold times. Since the first symbol hold mark is displayed simultaneously with the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, when a ball enters the first winning port 64, the ball is detected by the detection port 312d or the second symbol. Display of the first symbol hold mark is started when the detection port 5314c is passed. This display start is similarly performed in other embodiments.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (regardless of whether it is normal, probable change, or short), the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is set with a probability of about 1/1. The Therefore, since the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time by passing the ball through the third detection port 5314e, the ball can easily enter the second winning port 640 (see FIG. 2). be able to.

  In order to send a ball toward the third detection port 5314e, it is only necessary to cause the ball to enter the first winning port 64 frequently as will be described later, so that the second winning port 640 (see FIG. 2) is used. It is possible to motivate a player who wants to enter the ball to enter the first winning port 64 frequently.

  On the other hand, as will be described later, if the ball is entered into the first winning port 64 with a reduced frequency, the ball passes through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c instead of the third detection port 5314e. Therefore, the player can change the first symbol by changing the frequency of the ball entering the first winning port 64 to change the first symbol with the ball that has entered the first winning port 64, or the second symbol. Can be selected.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the first special symbol variable display is always started before the normal symbol variable display is executed, and the third symbol display device 81 performs variable display. Accordingly, it is possible to solve the problem that the timing at which the variable symbol display is started may be overlooked because the display on the third symbol display device 81 is too quiet. Further, by performing the variable display of the first special symbol together with the normal symbol variable display, it is possible to improve the attention to the variable display as compared with the case where only the normal symbol variable display is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate the number of suspensions among the number of passages of the through gate 67 (at the same time), and the third symbol display device 81 has a decoration indicating the number of suspensions. A second symbol hold mark is displayed as a typical display.

  Next, the stopping portion 5314b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a partially enlarged front view of the continuous passage groove 5314. In addition, in order to understand easily, illustration of the branch flow path 5314d and the stop apparatus 5500 is abbreviate | omitted.

  The stop portion 5314b is a hole-like incomplete flow path that passes through in the front-rear direction by removing the wall portion on the back side (the rear side in FIG. 40), and is formed of a pair of plates extending in the vertical direction. A sphere storage plate portion 5314b1, an upper end long hole 5314b2 that is a through-hole extending in the left-right direction at the upper end portion of the sphere storage plate portion 5314b1 and penetrating in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 40), and a sphere storage plate A lower end long hole 5314b3, which is a through hole extending in the front-rear direction and extending in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the upper end long hole 5314b2 at the lower end portion of the portion 5314b1, is mainly provided.

  The sphere storage plate portion 5314b1 is formed so that the length in the vertical direction is slightly longer than the diameter R of the sphere. Accordingly, the stopping portion 5314b formed by the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 is limited to one sphere that can be stopped at a time.

  The upper end long hole 5314b2 and the lower end long hole 5314b3 are set to have the same extension length, while the left and right end positions are shifted in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the upper end long hole 5314b2 is disposed in such a manner that the center position in the left-right direction coincides with the right end portion in front view of the ball storage plate portion 5314b2. That is, the right end portion of the upper end long hole 5314b2 is disposed at a position separated from the right end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the right by a length H1 that is half the total length of the upper end long hole 5314b2. Accordingly, the left end portion of the upper end long hole 5314b2 is moved from the left end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the left to the width length of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 (the length between the plates of the pair of plates, that is, the diameter). It is arranged at a position separated by a length that is subtracted by a width HR slightly longer than R.

  On the other hand, the lower end long hole 5314b3 is arranged in such a manner that the center position in the left-right direction coincides with the left end portion in front view of the ball storage plate portion 5314b2. That is, the left end portion of the lower end long hole 5314b3 is disposed at a position separated from the left end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 by a length H1 to the left. Accordingly, the right end portion of the lower end long hole 5314b3 extends from the right end portion of the sphere storage plate portion 5314b1 to the right, from the length H1 to the width length of the sphere storage plate portion 5314b1 (the length between the plates of the pair of plates, that is, the diameter). It is arranged at a position separated by a length that is subtracted by a width HR slightly longer than R. That is, the right end positions of the upper end long hole 5314b2 and the lower end long hole 5314b3 are separated from each other by the width length HR in the left-right direction, and the left end positions of the upper end long hole 5314b2 and the lower end long hole 5314b3 are similarly the width length HR. Only left and right.

  Similar to the introduction groove 5314a, the game board 13 is disposed in the assembled state on the front side of the stop portion 5314b. Thereby, since the opening on the front side is closed by the game board 13, a groove shape that restricts the passage of the sphere except for the opening on the back side and the upper and lower openings is formed.

  The remaining opening on the back side is closed by a movable plate portion 5510 (see FIG. 39) that is slidably supported by the upper end long hole 5314b2 and the lower end long hole 5314b3. The flow path shape to be regulated is configured. Hereinafter, the stopping device 5500 will be described with reference to FIG.

  41 (a) is a front view of the stopping device 5500, and FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the stopping device 5500 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIb in FIG. 41 (a). 41 (a) and 41 (b), the stopping device 5500 includes a movable plate portion 5510 that is slidably supported by the stopping portion 5314b in the assembled state, and a driving force that operates the movable plate portion 5510. , A rod-shaped transmission member 5530 that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device 5520 to the movable plate portion 5510, and a detection device 5540 that detects the position of the transmission member 5530. .

  The movable plate portion 5510 includes a main body plate portion 5511 formed of a plate member having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an upper extension plate 5512 and a lower extension plate that extend from the main body plate portion 5511 to the front side as a pair. 5513 and a connecting convex portion 5514 that protrudes from the back surface of the main body plate portion 5511 toward the transmission member 5530.

  The upper extension plate 5512 and the lower extension plate 5513 have a horizontal dimension of length H1, and a vertical dimension (thickness) shorter than the vertical width dimension of the upper end long hole 5314b2, and the front-rear dimension (extension length). Is formed as a thin plate having a length such that the distance from the game board 13 is less than the diameter R in the assembled state. Further, the upper extending plate 5512 and the lower extending plate 5513 are arranged in parallel with each other and their left and right end portions are shifted from each other by the width length HR.

  The drive device 5520 is a drive motor 5521 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) that is driven to rotate, and a disk shape that rotates with the rotation of the drive motor 5521 and transmits the drive force to the transmission member 5530. And a base member 5523 which is a base-like member fixed to the game board 13 and to which the case of the drive motor 5521 is fastened and fixed.

  The rotating disk 5522 has a driving shaft 5521a of the driving motor 5521 inserted and fixed at the center of the circle, and protrudes from the center of the circle by a width length HR toward the transmission member 5530 from an eccentric position. A transmission convex portion 5522a is provided.

  The base member 5523 has a flat surface whose upper surface is formed substantially horizontally, extends upward from the upper surface, and includes a plurality of clamping portions 5523a for clamping the first rod portion 5531 from the front and rear in the assembled state.

  The sandwiching portion 5523a is a plurality of rib-like portions that are arranged in parallel to be spaced apart in the front-rear width dimension of the first rod portion 5531 and that are scattered on a straight line that faces left and right. Two pieces are arranged before and after the bar portion 5531. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 5530 from being displaced forward and backward, and it is possible to facilitate the sliding operation in the left-right direction due to the guiding effect.

  The transmission member 5530 is formed in an L shape extending in the left-right direction and the up-down direction starting from the lower right portion when viewed from the front, and is one of the rod-shaped portions placed on the flat upper surface of the base member 5523 (left when viewed from the front A first rod portion 5531 connected to the movable plate portion 5510 at the end of the first rod portion, a rod-like second rod portion 5532 extending vertically upward from the other end portion of the first rod portion 5531, and the first It mainly includes a long connecting hole 5533 that penetrates the two rod portions 5532 in the front-rear direction and is long in the vertical direction.

  The first rod portion 5531 is supported on the flat upper surface of the base member 5523, so that it can move in the left-right direction along the flat upper surface, and can receive the connecting convex portion 5514 of the movable plate portion 5510 at one end. A receiving recessed portion 5531a that is recessed in the portion, and a detected portion 5531b that protrudes toward the detection device 5540 side (upward) at an intermediate position in the left-right direction.

  In comparison with the dimensions of the connecting convex portion 5514, the receiving concave portion 5531a has a substantially equal length (or slightly longer) in the left-right direction, and the vertical size allows a slight backlash (a gap is formed). It is said to be length.

  As a result, the lateral displacement between the receiving concave portion 5531a and the connecting convex portion 5514 is suppressed, and when a load is applied from the connecting convex portion 5514 to the receiving concave portion 5531a, the positional deviation in the vertical direction is caused. , That load can be released.

  Here, in the case where the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 are formed by integral molding, there is no displacement in the left-right direction, but it is difficult to release the load, and durability tends to be low. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by configuring the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 as separate members, it is possible to improve the durability against the load while suppressing the displacement in the left-right direction.

  In the present embodiment, since the vertical position of the movable plate portion 5510 does not change due to the drive of the driving device 5520, even if the positional deviation in the vertical direction between the connecting convex portion 5514 and the receiving concave portion 5531a is allowed, It does not affect the performance described later (the function of sliding the movable plate portion 5510 to the left and right to open or close the flow path).

  The connecting elongated hole 5533 has a vertically extending length that is at least twice the width length HR, and can receive and connect the transmission convex portion 5522a of the driving device 5520. As the arrangement of the transmission projections 5522a changes with the rotation of the rotating disk 5522, the arrangement of the connection elongated holes 5533 connected thereto changes, so that the transmission member 5530 slides (see FIGS. 42 and 42). 43).

  The detection means 5540 is a detection sensor in which the support member 5541 fixed to the base member 5523 and the detection groove faces the side (lower side) arranged to face the first rod portion 5531, and is a front view of the support member 5541. It mainly includes a first sensor 5542 fixed to the right end portion, and a second sensor 5543 that is the same type of sensor as the first sensor 5542 and is fixed to the left end portion in front view of the support member 5541 in the same posture.

  The first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are transmissive sensors that include a light emitter and a light receiver that are opposed to each other with the detected portion 5531b interposed therebetween, and detect the detected portion 5531b that slides left and right. That is, the detected portion 5531b is arranged between the light emitter and the light receiver (arranged in the front-rear direction at the lower end position in FIG. 41A), so that the light emitted from the light emitter toward the light receiver is blocked. The detected portion 5531b is detected by the first sensor 5542 or the second sensor 5543.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, an operation mode of the stopping device 5500 will be described. 42 (a), FIG. 42 (b), FIG. 43 (a), and FIG. 43 (b) are front views of the retaining portion 5314b and the retaining device 5500. 42 and 43, the main body plate portion 5511 of the movable plate portion 5510 disposed on the back side (the back side in FIG. 42) of the plate portion constituting the outer shape of the continuous passage groove 5314 and overlapping the plate portion. However, it is illustrated in a simple solid line including the overlapping portion.

  In FIG. 42A, the state where the rotating disk 5522 is in the initial phase (both closed states of the stationary device 5500) is shown in FIG. 42B, and the rotating disk 5522 is clockwise when viewed from the initial phase. In FIG. 43 (a), the state that is the second phase at the time when it is rotated 90 degrees (the open state of the stopping device 5500) is 90 degrees clockwise from the second phase in the front view. The state that is the third phase at the time point (the closed state of the stopping device 5500) is the fourth phase at the time point when the rotating disk 5522 rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the third phase in the front view. Each state (lower open state of the stopping device 5500) is illustrated.

  Note that the displacements in the states shown in FIGS. 42A, 42B, 43A, and 43B occur at equal time intervals, and from the state shown in FIG. 43B. When the time further elapses, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. That is, the change in the state shown in FIGS. 42A, 42B, 43A, and 43B is repeated at regular intervals from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the present embodiment, the drive motor 5521 is controlled at an operation speed at which the rotating disk 5522 rotates once in about 6 seconds.

  In the state shown in FIG. 42A, the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is less than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even when the ball P52 reaches the upper portion of the stopping portion 5314b in the state shown in FIG. 42A, the entering of the ball P52 into the stopping portion 5314b is restricted. Further, the lower opening of the stopping portion 5314b is also closed by the lower extending plate 5513 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is less than the diameter of the sphere).

  From the state illustrated in FIG. 42A to the state illustrated in FIG. 42B, the lower opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the lower extending plate 5513 (the gap between the continuous passage grooves 5314). Is less than the diameter of the sphere). On the other hand, the upper extending plate 5512 is retracted and opened from the upper opening of the stopping portion 5314b (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the ball P52 reaches the upper portion of the stop portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 42A to the state shown in FIG. 42B, the ball P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. Although balls are allowed, discharge from the stop 5314b is restricted.

  From the state illustrated in FIG. 42B to the state illustrated in FIG. 43A, the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is a sphere). Less than the diameter). Further, the lower opening of the stopping portion 5314b is also closed by the lower extending plate 5513 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is less than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the ball P52 reaches the upper portion of the stop portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 42B to the state shown in FIG. 43A, the ball P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. The ball is regulated.

  From the state illustrated in FIG. 43 (a) to the state illustrated in FIG. 43 (b), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap between the continuous passage grooves 5314 is spherical). Less than the diameter). On the other hand, the lower extension plate 5513 is retracted and opened from the lower opening of the stopping portion 5314b (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the ball P52 reaches the upper portion of the stop portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the ball P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. The ball is regulated. Further, this regulation is similarly maintained until the state shown in FIG. 43B is returned to the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, the sphere disposed in the stopping portion 5314b in the state illustrated in FIG. 43A is discharged toward the second detection port 5314c in the state illustrated in FIG.

  Accordingly, since the stopping portion 5314b does not open at the same time in a series of operations of the movable plate portion 5510, the ball P52 reaching the stopping portion 5314b can be reliably stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the rotating disk 5522 is rotated clockwise in front view, but the same repetitive operation can be executed with a half-cycle shift even when rotating in the counterclockwise direction in front view. That is, since the rotation direction is not limited, the degree of freedom in designing the drive mode can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the transmission member 5530 that slides to the left and right with the rotation of the rotating disk 5522 can be detected by the detection device 5540 at all times. That is, the initial phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 42A is detected by both the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543, and the second phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. In the phase, it is detected by the first sensor 5542 but not by the second sensor 5543. In the third phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 43A, the first sensor is the same as the initial phase. 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are detected, and in the fourth phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 43B, the first sensor 5542 does not detect, but the second sensor 5543 detects.

  Therefore, when the transmission member 5530 is operating normally, the outputs of the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are switched at regular intervals, so the output of the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 can be switched. By confirming the mode, it is possible to immediately determine whether the operation is normal or some abnormality (for example, the operation has been stopped due to an operation failure).

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a sphere may get on the upper surfaces of the upper extending plate 5512 and the lower extending plate 5513. In this case, the extension plates 5512 and 5513 may be inclined to the front side due to the weight of the sphere. However, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the upper extension plate 5512 has a lower end on the upper end long hole 5314b2. The extended plate 5513 is inserted into the lower end long hole 5314b3 from the back side, and the movement in the vertical direction is restricted. Accordingly, the tilt angle of each of the extended plates 5512 and 5513 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 are configured as separate members, and are configured in a mode that allows some backlash in the vertical direction, so the movable plate portion 5510 tilts toward the front side. The degree (transmission degree) of the tilting operation of the transmission member 5530 accompanying the operation can be suppressed.

  Accordingly, since the transmission member 5530 can be prevented from tilting back and forth, it is possible to prevent an increase in resistance generated at a connection position (contact position) with the rotating disk 5522 and transmission. It is possible to prevent the member 5530 from contacting the sensors 5542 and 5543 in the front-rear direction and applying a load to the sensors 5542 and 5543.

  Next, a flow mode of a sphere flowing down the main body member 5310 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of each part when a ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected, and FIGS. 45 (a), 45 (b), and 46 (a). FIG. 46B is a partial front view of the continuous passage groove 5314 and the stopping device 5500 showing an example of the movement of the sphere in the continuous passage groove 5314. In order to facilitate understanding of the stopping device 5500, only the movable plate portion 5510 is shown, and the other configurations are omitted, and the movable plate portion 5510 is visible through the stopping portion 5314b in a front view. The part is illustrated by a solid line, and the other part is illustrated by a hidden line (broken line).

  In FIG. 44, when the output pulse of the detection port 312d, the second detection port 5314c, or the third detection port 5314e is turned ON, the sphere has passed through the detection port 312d, the second detection port 5314c, or the third detection port 5314e. Waveforms are illustrated in a manner that indicates timing. In the timing chart of the introduction groove 5314a, a pulse rises upward when a ball enters the introduction groove 5314a from the first groove 5311, and a pulse rises downward when the ball is discharged from the introduction groove 5314a to the stop portion 5314b. In an aspect, a waveform is illustrated. Note that the waveform of the timing chart of the stopping device 5500 indicates a change in state, but is simplified as a rectangular wave for easy understanding.

  In the timing chart shown in FIG. 44, balls P51 to P55 continuously enter the first winning opening 64 at intervals of about 0.2 seconds. In the present embodiment, the description will be made on the assumption that the upper limit of the number of balls that enter at a time is five. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 44, the upper limit number of balls enter the first winning opening 64 continuously. Corresponds to a ball.

  Of the balls that have entered the first winning port 64, the ball P51 that has entered at the beginning passes through the detection port 312d while changing the stopping device 3340 from the initial state to the changed state. After the stop device 3340 changes to the change state, it takes at least 3 seconds for the maintenance of the state to be released by the action of the ball P51, so that the follower balls P52 to P55 will hit the change state stop device 3340. The ball enters the continuous passage groove 5314 while making contact.

  In FIG. 44, the case where the balls P52 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64 after the ball P51 is illustrated, but the ball entering mode is not limited to this. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, it takes 3 seconds until the change state of the stop device 3340 is released by the action of the ball P51, and after the release, the stop device 3340 is in the initial state. Since about 1 second is required until the stop device 3340 is changed from the initial state to the changed state by the action of the ball P51, the stop device 3340 causes the ball to flow down to the continuous passage groove 5314 for about 4 seconds. The flow path is switched to In other words, according to the present embodiment, the first winning opening is not limited to the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 in succession, but within about 4 seconds after the ball P51 has entered the first winning opening 64. The ball that has entered the ball 64 can be caused to enter the continuous passage groove 5314 by the action of the stop device 3340.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, the stopping device 5500 is in the open state at the timing when the follower balls P52 to P55 reach the lower end of the continuous passage groove 5314. The sphere P52, which is a sphere, enters the stopping portion 5314b, and the other spheres P53 to P55 stay in the continuous passage groove 5314 (see FIG. 45A).

  As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, when the number of follower balls is large (in this example, four balls P52 to P55), the ball P55 staying in the continuous passage groove 5314 is It can stop at the front side position of the upper limit discharge port 5314a1.

  In this case, the ball P55 is pushed out toward the upper limit discharge port 5314a1 by collision with the ball P54 that stays first (the speed component toward the back side is increased), enters the branch flow path 5314d, and enters the third Passes through the detection port 5314e. Accordingly, the upper limit number (dynamic upper limit number) of the introduction grooves 5314a capable of retaining the balls in the continuous passage groove 5314 and the retention portion 5314b (dynamic upper limit number) is set to three, and there are more balls entered. Even so, those spheres do not stay and flow into the branch flow path 5314d and later pass through the third detection port 5314e (see FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (a)).

  Thereby, even if it is a case where the frequency | count that the ball-entry frequency to the 1st winning opening 64 is adjusted too high, it can prevent that the ball | bowl which stays in the continuous passage groove | channel 5314 increases too much, Therefore A flow path is Clogging can be prevented.

  As illustrated in FIG. 44, the balls P52 to P54 later pass through the second detection port 5314c. That is, among the plurality of balls P51 to P55 that have entered the first winning port 64, the leading ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d, and the follower balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c and overflow. The sphere P55 passes through the third detection port 5314e.

  Therefore, the ball P51 necessarily passes through the detection port 312d before the ball P55 passes through the third detection port 5314e regardless of the timing at which the game is started. Therefore, at the timing when the sphere P55 enters the third detection port 5314e, it is possible to execute a variable display that is started due to at least the passage of the sphere through the detection port 312d. Thereby, it is possible to naturally pay attention to the variable display executed due to the passage of the sphere through the third detection port 5314e.

  In other words, the variation display (the variation display of the first symbol or the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 associated therewith) started due to the ball passing through the detection port 312d shifts the gaming state to the jackpot state. Since the display is a variable display related to whether or not to perform, the player's attention is naturally gathered, whereas the variable display (ordinary symbol (the first symbol (first symbol) that starts when the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e). 2) or the accompanying variation display on the third symbol display device 81) is not a variation display that is directly related to the transition to the big hit state, so that attention is difficult to gather.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation display (ordinary symbol (second symbol) variation display started by the sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e or the accompanying third symbol display device 81) is started. Is always displayed when the ball passes through the detection port 312d (change display of the first symbol or accompanying change display on the third symbol display device 81). ) Is executed, the three symbol display device 81 can simultaneously display those variations, and the first symbol variation display or the accompanying variation display attention in the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed. By utilizing this, it is possible to pay attention to the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) or the variation display on the third symbol display device 81 associated therewith.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) and the symbol that is displayed to be stopped is a symbol indicating a win (for example, a symbol “◯”). Therefore, the normal symbol (the second symbol) is a win, and the electric player 640a is opened and the ball is easy to enter the second winning port 640, but the player does not notice it. Can be prevented.

  It should be noted that the upper limit of the number of spheres that can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the retention portion 5314b varies depending on the sphere entry timing. That is, as described above, if the stopping device 5500 is in the open state when the leading ball P52 reaches the lower end of the introducing groove 5314a among the balls that have entered the introducing groove 5314a, the ball P52 is placed on the stopping portion 5314b. Since the third sphere P55 counted from the sphere P53 is discharged to the branch flow path 5314d, the upper limit of the number of spheres that can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the retention portion 5314b is 3 of the spheres P52 to P54. It becomes a piece.

  On the other hand, when the stopping device 5500 is in both closed state or lower open state when the leading ball P52 reaches the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a, the ball P52 does not enter the stopping portion 5314b, and the introduction groove 5314a The vehicle stops at the lower end position (see FIG. 46B). In this case, since the third sphere P54 counted from the sphere P52 is discharged to the branch flow path, the upper limit of the number of spheres that can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the retention portion 5314b is the spheres P52, P53. It becomes two.

  In this case, if the stopping device 5500 changes to the upper open state before the ball P54 stops in the introduction groove 5314a, the ball P53 also descends as the ball P52 enters the stopping portion 5314b. Since a gap is formed between the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 and the sphere P53, the sphere P54 can stay in the introduction groove 5314a (see FIG. 45A). As a result, the upper limit of the number of spheres that can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the retention portion 5314b is three spheres P52 to P54.

  As described above, by changing the upper limit of the number of balls that can be retained in the introduction groove 5314a and the retaining portion 5314b according to the timing, even if the same number and frequency are entered in the first winning opening 64, the result As described above, the profit given to the player can be changed according to the timing of entering the ball. As a result, a fresh game (a game that never gets tired) can be provided.

  An interval of timing when the balls P51 to P54 pass through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c will be described. The period required for the ball P51 to enter the first winning port 64 and pass through the detection port 312d is set unchanged.

  On the other hand, the period from when the leading ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d to when the follower ball P52 enters immediately after the ball P51 passes through the second detection port 5314c varies depending on the situation.

  This is because, in order for the ball P52 to pass through the second detection port 5314c, the stopping device 5500 needs to change its state to the lower opening state after the ball P52 enters the stopping portion 5314b in the upper opening state of the stopping device 5500. However, depending on how many seconds after the stopping device 5500 changes to the upper open state, the stopping device 5500 enters the lower open state after the ball P52 enters the stopping portion 5314b. Depending on the time until.

  In the present embodiment, the period from the first ball P51 passing through the detection port 312d to the ball immediately after entering the detection port 312d until the follower ball P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c is the first winning port 64. The shape of the introduction groove 5314a is designed so as to be equal to or longer than a variable period (3 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as a reserved digestion lower limit period) that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is three or four. Note that the reserved digestion lower limit period, which is a variable period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4, is the same in other embodiments (for example, the first embodiment) unless otherwise specified. Is done.

  That is, the ball that has entered the continuous passage groove 5314 passes through the second detection port 5314c after passing through the introduction groove 5314a and the stopping portion 5314b. In this embodiment, the stopping ball acting on the ball that reaches the stopping portion 5314b is used. It takes 1.5 seconds at the shortest for the device 5500 to change state from the upper open state to the lower open state.

  Therefore, when a ball enters the stopping portion 5314b immediately before the stopping device 5500 changes from the upper open state to the closed state (it is possible to enter the stopping portion 5314b, and then the stopping device 5500 is in the lower open state. Even when the time required to change the state is the shortest), it takes 1.5 seconds for the ball to be ejected from the stop 5314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c.

  In the present embodiment, the retention digestion lower limit period is defined as 3 seconds. Therefore, if the time required for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a is 1.5 seconds or more, the ball enters the continuous passage groove 5314. It is assumed that the retention digestion lower limit period elapses from the first detection port to the second detection port 5314c. In the present embodiment, in consideration of the margin, the introduction groove 5314a is designed in a shape (length, inclination, etc.) that requires 2 seconds for the sphere flowing down due to gravity to pass through the introduction groove 5314a.

  As a result, even if a plurality of balls P51 to P55 are entered into the first winning opening 64 when the number of the first special symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is three, the ball P52 Can be terminated by the time the first detection port 5314c passes through (the variation corresponding to when the first special symbol is held three times), the number of balls that have entered the first winning port 64 On the other hand, a lottery opportunity (an opportunity for lottery of the first symbol or the second symbol) that can be obtained by the player can be ensured to the maximum.

  The intervals at which the follower balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c are equally spaced according to the operating speed of the stopping device 5500. This is because no matter how many follower balls P52 to P54 flow down the introduction groove 5314a, only one ball can enter the stop portion 5314b.

  That is, the balls P53 and P54 that have entered the first winning opening 64 after the ball P52 are designated to enter the stopping portion 5314b regardless of the state of the stopping device 5500. More specifically, when the ball P53 reaches the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a when the stopping device 5500 is in the upwardly open state, the flow is restricted to the ball P52 that stops in advance in the stopping portion 5314b, and the ball P52 is moved from the stopping portion 5314b. It is impossible for the ball P53 to enter the stopping portion 5314b until it is discharged.

  Therefore, regardless of the state of the stopping device 5500 when the ball P53 reaches the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a, the stopping device 5500 is next opened (next if it was in the opened state at the time of arrival). Until the state changes to the state, the ball P53 is positioned above the upper extending plate 5512 and does not enter the stopping portion 5314b.

  Thereafter, the ball P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c immediately after the stopping device 5500 changes to the lower open state. Thereafter, each time the stopping device 5500 is in the upper open state, the balls P53 and P54 enter the stopping portion 5314b one by one, and every time the stopping device 5500 changes to the lower open state through both closed states, Passes through the second detection port 5314c.

  Accordingly, the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c one by one each time the stopping device 5500 is in the downward open state, so that the intervals at which the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c are kept constant. can do. In the present embodiment, since the stopping device 5500 is controlled so as to repeatedly operate at intervals of 6 seconds, the spheres P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c at intervals of 6 seconds.

  Therefore, since the interval at which the balls P52 to P54 are detected can be set to be longer than the reserved digest lower limit period, the balls P52 to P54 are detected before the reserved digest lower limit period elapses. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage that a lottery opportunity for the number of balls entered cannot be obtained.

  As described above, since the timing at which the ball P52 that has entered the first winning port 64 immediately after the top ball P51 enters the stopping unit 5314b can be changed depending on the state of the stopping device 5500, the ball P51 is detected by the detecting port 312d. And the timing at which the sphere P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c can be changed depending on the time (passing interval is changed). For this reason, even when the first winning opening 64 is continuously entered at the same interval, the timing (interval) at which the first symbol is held on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed depending on the time. , Can give the game freshness.

  In particular, when the ball continuously enters the first winning port 64 while the ball stays in the continuous passage groove 5314, the ball has newly entered the continuous passage groove 5314 due to the action of the ball staying in the continuous passage groove 5314. The ball is prevented from entering the stopping portion 5314b. Accordingly, since the timing at which a ball newly entered into the continuous passage groove 5314 passes through the second detection port 5314c can be delayed, the occurrence of overflow caused by the ball entered into the first winning port 64 can be suppressed. Can do.

  Moreover, for example, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed as two, a case where the balls P51 to P55 enter in the manner shown in FIG. 44 will be described. At this time, the currently displayed variation display (variable display for 6 seconds) ends before the passage of the sphere P52 through the second detection port 5314c and ends after the passage of the sphere P52 through the second detection port 5314c. Since this is considered to be the case, it will be described in order.

  When the change display ends before the passage of the sphere P52 through the second detection port 5314c, the sphere P51 passes through the detection port 312d before the passage of the sphere P52. The fluctuation display is started, and the fluctuation display (3 seconds) and the next fluctuation display (3 seconds) are finished before the sphere P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Accordingly, two vacant balls are reserved before the balls P53 and P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c. Therefore, the first special trigger is triggered by the passage of the balls P53 and P54 through the second detection port 5314c. Symbol variation display can be executed. That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum benefit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

  When the change display ends after the passage of the sphere P52 through the second detection port 5314c, the spheres P51 and P52 pass through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c after the passage of the sphere P52 and before the passage of the sphere P53. As a result, the variable display (3 seconds) in the state where the number of held balls is four is started, and the variable display ends before the ball P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Thereafter, the ball P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c while the fluctuation display (3 seconds) started when the number of held balls is three is executed, and thereafter, the ball P53 starts when the number of held balls is four. After the change display (3 seconds) is completed, the ball P54 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the variation display of the first special symbol by using the balls P52 to P54 as a trigger when passing through the second detection port 5314c. That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum benefit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

  Moreover, for example, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed as one, the case where the balls P51 to P55 enter in the manner shown in FIG. 44 will be described. At this time, the currently displayed variation display (variable display for 10 seconds) ends before the passage of the sphere P51 through the detection port 312d, and after the passage of the sphere P51 through the detection port 312d and the second display of the sphere P52. It can be considered that the process ends before the passage of the detection port 5314c and the case where the process ends after the passage of the sphere P52 through the second detection port 5312c and before the passage of the sphere P53 through the second detection port 5314c. These will be described in order. In the present embodiment, the time for the variable display that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is 0 is set to 15 seconds.

  When the variation display ends before the passage of the sphere P51 through the detection port 312d, the variation display started when the number of held balls is 0 is executed before the sphere P51 passes through the detection port 312d. For this reason, four vacant areas of the reserved balls of the first special symbol are secured, so that the variation display of the first special symbol is executed by using the balls P51 to P54 as a trigger through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c. can do. That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum benefit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

  If the variation display ends after the passage of the sphere P51 through the detection port 312d and before the passage of the sphere P52 through the second detection port 5314c, the variation display being performed when the sphere P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c is The change display (6 seconds) started when the number of held balls is two. Therefore, since the fluctuation display is finished before the ball P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c, there are two free areas of the reserved balls of the first special symbol before the ball P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol using the passage of the balls P51 to P54 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c as a trigger. That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum benefit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

  When the variation display ends after the passage of the sphere P52 through the second detection port 5314c and before the passage of the sphere P53 through the second detection port 5314c, the variation display started after the end of the variation display has a retained ball count of 3. It will be a variable display (3 seconds) starting at the time. Therefore, the change display ends before the ball P54 passes the second detection port 5314c. Therefore, before the ball P54 passes the second detection port 5314c, the free space of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is displayed. Since one can be secured, it is possible to execute the variation display of the first special symbol using the passage of the balls P51 to P54 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c as a trigger. That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum benefit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

  When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is zero, there is sufficient space for the number of reserved balls (more than the number of data acquired by passing through the detection ports 312d or the second detection ports 5314c of the balls P51 to P54). Therefore, regardless of the end timing of the fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol can be executed using the passage of the balls P51 to P54 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c as a trigger. That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum benefit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, not only when the number of reserved balls is three, but even when the number of reserved balls is between 0 and 2, as shown in FIG. Thus, it is possible to ensure the maximum benefit given to the player by continuously entering the balls P51 to P55.

  Here, the sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e will be described. For example, a sphere that has entered the first winning opening 64 is changed to a detection port A that executes a variation display of the first special symbol by the passage of the sphere, and a detection port B that executes a variation display of the normal symbol by the passage of the sphere. In the case of gaming machines that are distributed in order, if the previous game ended immediately after the ball passed through the detection port A, the first winning port 64 first of the balls fired by the next player to play the game. The ball that entered the ball passes through the detection port B. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute the normal symbol variation display before the first special symbol variation display is executed, the period required for the player to win the jackpot is extended.

  In addition, since it is difficult for the above-described gaming machine to determine whether the next ball to enter the detection port A or the detection port B, the ball that first enters the first winning port 64 Thus, it is difficult to determine whether the variation display of the first special symbol is performed or whether the variation display of the normal symbol is performed, which may impair the willingness to start the game.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, at least the ball that first entered the first winning port 64 after the start of the game inevitably passes through the detection port 312d (the detection port that executes the variation display of the first special symbol). And does not pass through the third detection port 5314e (detection port that executes normal symbol variation display). On the other hand, when a predetermined number of balls or more enter the first winning port 64 within a predetermined period, the balls enter the third detection port 5314e.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, the gaming machine has a merit that it is possible to execute the normal symbol variation display by the manner of entering the first winning opening 64, while the player starts the game. Regardless of the situation, it is possible to maintain the function of executing the variable display of the first special symbol with the first ball entering the first winning opening 64 as a trigger. Thereby, decline in game willingness can be prevented.

  According to the present embodiment, when the balls P51 to P55 have entered the first winning port 64 in a short period of time, the follower ball (for example, the ball P53) is stopped by the stopping device 5500, and the second detection port In addition to delaying the passage of 5314c, a function of stopping the flow of the sphere that has passed through the continuous passage groove 5314 out of the spheres that have entered the first winning port 64 in a follow-up manner is provided. That is, for example, two more spheres 8 seconds after the sphere P51 shown in FIG. 44 enters the first prize opening 64 (almost simultaneously with the timing when the sphere P53 passes the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a). When the ball enters the first winning port 64, the leading ball changes the stop device 3340 in the same manner as the ball P51 and then goes to the detection port 312d, while the follower ball is the same as the ball P52. Into the continuous passage groove 5314.

  At this time, in the continuous passage groove 5314, the balls P53 and P54 are stopped by the stopping device 5500. Accordingly, the follower sphere is stopped by the sphere P54 on the upstream side of the sphere P54. That is, even when a ball enters the first winning port 64 with an interval (for example, an interval longer than the period required for the stop device 3340 to return to the initial state) Can be dammed to the ball that has previously entered the first winning opening 64. Therefore, the timing at which the follower ball passes through the second detection port 5314c can be delayed by the action caused by the balls P53 and P54 previously entered (after the balls P53 and P54 have passed through the second detection port 5314c). , The follower ball can pass through the second detection port 5314c).

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the stopping device 5500 performs a certain operation by the single driving device 5520 has been described. However, in the delay device 6300 in the sixth embodiment, the stopping device 6500 is operated by a plurality of driving devices 6520. That is, unlike the fifth embodiment, it is possible to create a plurality of intervals for the spheres that have passed through the introduction groove 5314a of the continuous passage groove 6314 to pass through the second detection port 5314c. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the description of the present embodiment, FIG.

  47 (a) and 47 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 6300 in the sixth embodiment. 47A and 47B, the balls P61 and P62 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is changed. . 47A shows a state where the pair of movable plate portions 6510 of the stopping device 6500 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both closed states), and FIG. 47B shows a pair of movable plates. A state in which the portion 6510 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both open states) is illustrated.

  The pair of balls P61 and P62 shown in FIGS. 47A and 47B are shown when they enter the first winning opening 64 with a slight gap. In this embodiment, the ball P61 passes through the post-detection flow path 5313 (passes over 3 seconds), and the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state (returns over 1 second) until the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state. The contacted sphere flows down the continuous passage groove 6314 in the same manner as the sphere P62. That is, the ball that has entered the first winning port 64 within about 4 seconds after the previous ball P61 has entered the first winning port 64 passes through the continuous passage groove 6314 in the same manner as the ball P62. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the continuous passage groove 6314 is caused to flow down not only with the balls that have entered the first winning port 64 in a continuous state, but also with balls that have entered the first winning port 64 at intervals. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the delay device 6300 are configured as symmetrical devices with the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals as those in the description are given, and the description of the same parts as those in the third embodiment is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the delay device 6300 includes a main body member 6310 having a flow path for guiding a ball that has entered the first winning port 64 to the detection port 312d, and an action of the ball that flows down inside the main body member 6310. The stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the above, and when the stop device 3340 enters the change state (see FIG. 39), the state is maintained and stopped as the posture changes due to the action of the ball that has passed through the detection port 312d. A maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state of the device 3340 and a stopping device 6500 for acting on a sphere flowing down a continuous passage groove 6314 described later and stopping the sphere are mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the main body member 6310 forms a downwardly inclined flow path and guides a ball entered from the first winning port 64 to a position vertically above the detection port 312d, and its first groove 5311. From the middle position of the second groove 5312, the second groove 5312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, the post-detection flow path 5313 for guiding the sphere passing through the detection port 312d, and the second groove 5312. And a continuous passage groove 6314 formed as a groove branched to the side (right side in FIG. 47).

  The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the post-detection flow path 5313, and the continuous passage groove 6314 have a groove shape having an open part on the game board 13 side, and the open part is formed in the game board 13 in the assembled state. By being closed, a passage through which the sphere flows down is formed.

  Note that the first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, and the post-detection flow path 5313 are symmetrical to the configuration of the same name (the first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, and the post-detection flow path 3313) in the third embodiment. Therefore, the description overlapping with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

  In the second groove 5312, the side wall portion 312e extends to the detection port 312d. Between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e, a continuous passage groove 6314 that forms a branch passage through which a ball can be sent is disposed.

  The continuous passage groove 6314 of the delay device 6300 includes a retaining portion 6314b connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and a second detection port 5314c is disposed directly below the retaining portion 6314b.

  The stopping part 6314b is configured as a groove part capable of stopping only one sphere and allowing the sphere to flow down, like the stopping part 5314b of the fifth embodiment. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the sphere that has reached the stop 6314b may stop at the stop 6314b or may pass through the stop 6314b (not stop).

  The stopping device 6500 of the delay device 6300 includes a pair of movable plate portions 6510 and a pair of drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) that controls the drive of the movable plate portion 6510. The apparatus 6520 is mainly provided.

  The movable plate portion 6510 is located at a boundary portion between the introduction groove 5314a and the retaining portion 6314b, an upper movable plate 6511 that moves in and out of the continuous passage groove 6314, and a position separated by one sphere on the downstream side of the upper movable plate 6511. And the lower movable plate 6512 that moves in and out inside the continuous passage groove 6314.

  The upper movable plate 6511 regulates the flow of the sphere by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the continuous passage groove 6314 is less than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding into the continuous passage groove 6314 (the sphere is placed on the upper surface). In the retracted state where the continuous passage groove 6314 is retracted outward from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314, the ball is allowed to flow down.

  The lower movable plate 6512 extends in the extending direction of the continuous passage groove 6314 of the sphere by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the continuous passage groove 6314 is less than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding into the continuous passage groove 6314. The flow along the (vertical direction) is restricted, and the flow along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the continuous passage groove 6314 of the sphere is permitted in the retracted state where the continuous passage groove 6314 is retracted outward from the inside.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the center of the sphere P62 to pass through the upper movable plate 6511 (after entering the stop portion 6314b) and pass through the lower movable plate 6512 (discharged from the stop portion 6314b). The flow path resistance of the stopping portion 6314b is set so that NT falls within 0.1 seconds to 0.2 seconds.

  The driving device 6520 is fastened and fixed to the delay device 6300 and generates a driving force for moving the upper movable plate 6511 in and out, and the driving device 6520 is fastened and fixed to the delay device 6300 and moves the lower movable plate 6512 in and out. And a lower drive solenoid 6522 that generates a drive force.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the upper movable plate 6511 is driven by the upper drive solenoid 6521 and the lower movable plate 6512 is driven by the lower drive solenoid 6522, the respective operations can be made independent. Hereinafter, an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 will be described.

  FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512. The drive device 6520 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the pair of movable plate portions 6510 are operated in a fixed operation pattern illustrated in FIG. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the movable plate portion 6510 that changes depending on the timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the operation pattern of the movable plate portion 6510 includes an operation in the chain opening period T6a, an operation in the upper closing period T6b following the chain opening period T6a, and both opening following the upper closing period T6b. An operation in the period T6c and an operation in the lower closing period T6d following the both opening periods T6c are configured.

  In the chain open period T6a, the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 open and close alternately. After the upper movable plate 6511 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after closing), the lower movable plate 6512 retreats from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after opening the continuous passage groove 6314) with a slight delay. In the present embodiment, the upper movable plate 6511 is controlled to operate in such a manner that the state changes at intervals of 1.5 seconds, and the lower movable plate 6512 maintains the retracted state for 0.8 seconds and then changes the protruding state to 2.2. The operation is controlled in such a manner that it is maintained for a second and repeatedly changes to the retracted state, and the chain release period T6a is set to 30 seconds.

  Thereby, in the chain open period T6a, the number of spheres passing through the upper movable plate 6511 can be limited while the upper movable plate 6511 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314. In the present embodiment, since the number of spheres retained between the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 is one, the upper movable plate 6511 can move upward while retracting from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314. The upper limit number of spheres passing through the plate 6511 can be limited to one.

  Further, after the upper movable plate 6511 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314, it is 0.05 seconds (from the period required for the sphere to pass the lower movable plate 6512 (from 0.1 seconds to 0.2 seconds). The lower movable plate 6512 projects (closes) to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314.

  Thereby, it is possible to ensure that the sphere that has passed through the upper movable plate 6511 is stopped above the lower movable plate 6512, and it is possible to prevent the sphere from passing through. In the present embodiment, the lower movable plate 6512 switches from the projecting state to the retracted state 0.75 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 switches from the retracted state to the projecting state (intermediate timing of the projecting state maintaining period). In an aspect, the drive 6520 is driven.

  Here, since the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the protruding state for 0.75 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the protruding state, the ball P62 is formed immediately before the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state. Even when it passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters the stopping portion 6314b), the ball P62 can be reliably maintained on the upper side of the lower movable plate 6512 for at least 0.75 seconds.

  Further, since the period from when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state to when the lower movable plate 6512 is in the protruding state is shorter than the time NT, the ball immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the protruding state to the retracted state. Even when P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters the stop portion 6314b), while the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the protruding state (2.2 seconds), the ball P62 is moved to the lower movable plate 6512. It can be reliably maintained on the upper side.

  Accordingly, the ball P62 passes through the stopping portion 6314b (flows down without stopping on the upper side of the lower moving plate 6512) regardless of the timing when the ball P62 passes through the upper moving plate 6511 (enters the stopping portion 6314b). ) Can be prevented.

  In the upper closing period T6b, the upper movable plate 6511 projects to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 for a longer period (for example, 6 seconds) than the period in which the upper movable plate 6511 maintains the projection in the above-described chain opening period T6a. Thus, the sphere flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 is prevented from passing through the upper movable plate 6511. In this case, the sphere is likely to stay above the upper movable plate 6511 as compared to the chain opening period T6a.

  Therefore, compared with the chain opening period T6a, the upper closing period T6b detects the third ball from the upper discharge hole 5314a1 through the branch flow path 5314d when the balls continuously enter the continuous passage groove 6314. It becomes easy to pass through the mouth 5314e.

  In the present embodiment, with the trigger of the ball passing through the third detection port 5314e as a trigger, the normal symbol change display (the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) for restricting the ball from entering the second winning port 640) is displayed. It is configured to execute a lottery variation display to be opened. Therefore, as compared with the chain opening period T6a, it is easier to obtain the opportunity to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640 when the balls are continuously inserted into the first winning opening 64 during the upper closing period T6b. Can do.

  As a result, for example, as a pre-reading effect in the upper closing period T6b, a little before the upper closing period T6b starts, the five symbols are put in the first winning opening 64 in the third symbol display device 81 for 5 seconds. If it is possible, the player is informed that a special profit can be obtained by continuously injecting a ball into the first winning opening 64 by displaying "Electric power 640a is open?" Can do. As a result, the quality of the profit given to the player by continuously entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 can be changed according to the timing of entering the ball, thereby preventing the player from hitting the ball casually. can do.

  Further, the change in the quality of the profit given to the player by the timing of entering the ball is repeated at regular intervals regardless of the game mode of the player. In the present embodiment, the contents of the quality of profit related to the entry timing are set in such a manner as to be displayed on the third symbol display device. Therefore, the player can launch a ball at a desired timing, so that the player can play a game after recognizing the difference in the quality of profit given to the player at the timing of entering the ball.

  That is, in the upper closing period T6b, in exchange for the advantage that it is easy to open the electric accessory 640a by continuously entering the ball in the continuous passage groove 6314, the third lottery related to the lottery for opening the electric accessory 640a is performed. Since a player is not given a prize ball by passing a ball through the detection port 5314e, there is a problem that the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls that have entered the first prize port 64 tends to decrease.

  On the other hand, in the above-described chain opening period T6a, since the balls are sent to the stopping portion 6314b at a shorter interval than the upper closing period T6b, the balls are less likely to stay on the upper movable plate 6511, and the continuous passage groove The sphere flowing down 6314 can be easily passed through the second detection port 5314c without leaking. Therefore, although there is a difficulty that it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a, there is an advantage that the number of winning balls can be secured with respect to the number of balls that have entered the first winning opening 64.

  Therefore, if the player does not expect the electric component 640a to be released and wants to obtain a winning ball without fail, he or she launches the ball so as to continuously enter the ball during the chain opening period T6a. When it is desired to play a game with the expectation of the opening of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the desired profit by launching the ball so as to continuously enter the ball in the upper closing period T6b.

  In both open periods T6c, the stopping device 6500 is maintained in both open states (see FIG. 47B). In this case, the sphere flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 does not stop at the stop portion 6314b, passes through the stop portion 6314b and passes through the third detection port 5314e.

  Accordingly, since the sphere that has passed through the continuous passage groove 6314 does not enter the branch flow path 5314d from the upper discharge hole 5314a1, the sphere is prevented from passing through the third detection port 5314e. In the present embodiment, both open periods T6c are set for 6 seconds.

  Although the ball does not stop at the stopping portion 6314b, it takes two seconds for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a. On the other hand, the ball whose state has changed the stop device 3340 immediately opens the detection port 312d. Since it is possible to pass, in the balls P61 and P62 that have successively entered the first winning port 64, the timing at which the ball P61 passes through the detection port 312d and the timing at which the ball P62 passes through the second detection port 5314c are surely determined. Can be shifted.

  In the present embodiment, the upper closing period T6b is set to 6 seconds, and therefore, when the variable display is started simultaneously with the start timing of the upper closed period T6b (when the start timing of the variable display is the latest). In addition, it is possible to secure two vacant areas for the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the start timing of the subsequent both open periods T6c.

  That is, for example, even in the strictest case (when the number of balls held is four), the variable display (three seconds) that starts when the number of balls held is four, and when the number of balls held is three The variable display (3 seconds) displayed can be finished by the start timing of both release periods T6c, and two free areas for the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the start timing of both release periods T6c are secured. Can do.

  Here, since the number of balls that can be stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 in the upper closing period T6b is two, the balls that have stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 in the upper closing period T6b are in the second opening period T6c. The change display of the first special symbol can be executed with the passage through the two detection ports 5314c as a trigger. That is, it is possible to ensure the maximum benefit given to the player by entering a plurality of balls into the first winning opening 64.

  In the lower closing period T6d, the upper movable plate 6511 retreats from the continuous passage groove 6314 to allow passage of the sphere, while the lower movable plate 6512 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 to restrict the passage of the sphere.

  In comparison with the upper closing period T6b, the lower closing period T6d is the same as stopping the ball by the action of the movable plate portion 6510, but the number of balls that can be stopped is different. That is, in the lower closing period T6d, in addition to the number of balls stopped in the upper closing period T6b (two in this embodiment), the number of balls stopped in the stopping portion 6314b (one in this embodiment) Can be stopped.

  Therefore, in order to cause the sphere flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 to flow through the upper discharge hole 5314a1 to the branch flow path 5314d and pass through the third detection port 5314e, in addition to the number of entering balls required in the upper closing period T6b Thus, it is necessary to enter one more first winning opening 64. That is, the difficulty level of passing the sphere through the third detection port 5314e is higher than when passing the sphere through the third detection port 5314e during the upper closing period T6b.

  On the other hand, since the chain opening period T6a continues after the lower closing period T6d, one ball that has stopped at the stopping device 6500 in the lower closing period T6d is one ball in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 in the chain opening period T6a. Each passes through the second detection port 5314c. This ensures a longer period until the following sphere passes through the second detection port 5314c than in the case where the sphere stopped in the upper closing period T6b passes through the second detection port 5314c all at once in both open periods T6c. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere from passing through the second detection port 5314c in the state where the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the first special symbol is the maximum (four) (the sphere is the second one). It is possible to easily prevent a situation in which a lottery opportunity cannot be obtained after passing through the detection port 5314c).

  Therefore, for example, as a look-ahead effect in the lower closing period T6d, a little before the lower closing period T6d starts, the 3rd symbol display device 81 “5 balls + 1 in the first winning opening 64 for 5 seconds + 1” If it can be inserted, the message “Electric role 640a is open? (High difficulty, high security)” is displayed.

  As a result, a special profit can be obtained by continuously making the player enter the first winning opening 64, but the difficulty of obtaining the special profit is high. It can be informed that the degree of security with respect to securing the profit (the number of winning balls and the chance of lottery) given to the player by the played ball is high. Thereby, the interest with respect to the frequency with which the ball enters the first winning opening 64 can be increased, and the player can be prevented from casually launching the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the lower closing period T6d is set to 8 seconds (a period longer than the upper closing period T6b). As a result, the number of balls entering the first winning port 64 required for the balls flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 to flow through the upper discharge hole 5314a1 to the branch flow path 5314d and pass through the third detection port 5314e. Is a period that is longer than the upper closing period T6b, but it is possible to secure a sufficient period for a large number of balls to enter the first winning port 64, and the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e. You can make many opportunities.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the continuous opening period T6a (30 seconds), the upper closing period T6b (6 seconds), the both opening periods T6c (6 seconds), and the lower closing period T6d (8 seconds) are arranged in order. At the same time, the driving device 6520 is controlled so as to loop at intervals of 50 seconds.

  Accordingly, the stopping device 6500 operates in an operation mode corresponding to the continuous opening period T6a for more than half of the operating time, and during that time, the balls are discharged one by one from the stopping portion 6314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c. It is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol by using the trigger as a trigger (while making the first special symbol variable display easy to execute), and at other times, the first special symbol 64 A period (upper closing period T6b, lower closing period T6d) in which normal symbols can be displayed using a part of the ball, and a period in which normal symbols cannot be displayed (both open periods T6c). Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to realize a clear gaming property, and it is possible to realize a favorite gaming property by adjusting the timing of launch by the player.

  That is, for example, when a ball is to be entered into the first winning opening 64 specially for executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the ball toward the first winning opening 64 only during the chain release period T6a. May be launched, and during other periods (T6b to T6d), the launch of the sphere may be stopped and attention may be paid to the effects of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a ball that has entered the first winning port 64 passes through the third detection port 5314e.

  On the other hand, for example, when it is desired to obtain an ordinary symbol variation display opportunity at the expense of the first special symbol variation display opportunity, the first winning award is set with an aim at the upper closing period T6b and the lower closing period T6d. It is also possible to fire a sphere toward the mouth 64 and stop launching the sphere during other periods (T6a and T6c) and pay attention to the effects of the third symbol display device 81. This increases the possibility of passing through the third detection port 5314e when a ball continuously enters the first winning port 64, as compared to the case where the ball is always launched toward the first winning port 64. Can do.

  Next, a modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the number of spheres stopped at the stopping portion 6314b is limited to one, but the delay device 6300b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment is provided between the plates of the pair of movable plate portions 6510. The region (corresponding to the stop portion 6314b2) is configured to have a size capable of accommodating a plurality of balls (two in this embodiment). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In the description of the present embodiment, FIG.

  49 (a) and 49 (b) are partial front views of a delay device 6300b according to a modification of the sixth embodiment. 49A and 49B, the balls P61 and P62 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is changed. . 49A shows a state in which the pair of movable plate portions 6510 of the stopping device 6500b protrudes inside the continuous passage groove 6314 (both closed states), and FIG. 49B shows a pair of movable plates. A state in which the portion 6510 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both open states) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 49, the delay device 6300b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment has such a size that the retaining portion 6314b can accommodate two spheres in comparison with the configuration of the delay device 6300 of the sixth embodiment. There are two differences, that is, the upper movable plate 6511 and the upper drive solenoid 6521 of the stopping device 6500b are moved upward, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the same reference numerals as those in the sixth embodiment are given, and the description of the same parts as those in the sixth embodiment is omitted.

  The continuous passage groove 6314 of the delay device 6300b includes a retaining portion 6314b2 connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and a second detection port 5314c is disposed directly below the retaining portion 6314b2.

  Unlike the stopping part 6314b of the sixth embodiment in which only one sphere is contained, the stopping part 6314b2 is formed to have a size capable of containing a plurality of spheres (two in this embodiment). It is configured as a groove that can flow down.

  In the present embodiment, as described above in the sixth embodiment, the sphere that has reached the stopping portion 6314b2 can be formed both when stopping at the stopping portion 6314b2 and when passing through the stopping portion 6314b2 (not stopping). Thus, the driving device 6520 is driven.

  The stopping device 6500b of the delay device 6300b is composed of a pair of movable plate portions 6510 and a pair of drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portion 6510. The apparatus 6520 is mainly provided.

  The movable plate portion 6510 is located at the boundary between the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 6314b2 and is moved up and down inside the continuous passage groove 6314, and at a position separated by two spheres downstream of the upper movable plate 6511. And the lower movable plate 6512 that moves in and out inside the continuous passage groove 6314.

  That is, the upper movable plate 6511 in the present embodiment is disposed at a position elevated by one sphere compared to the upper movable plate 6511 in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the projecting state and the sphere stops above the upper movable plate 6511, the second sphere from the end of the continuous passage groove 6314 on the stop portion 6314b side is the front side of the upper limit discharge hole 5314a. (FIG. 49 (a), the front side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface), and the sphere is guided to the branch flow path 5314d through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1.

  Therefore, when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the protruding state, the number of balls that can be retained on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 is set to one. Therefore, only one sphere stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 can be dropped immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 is changed from the protruding state to the retracted state.

  Further, when the upper movable plate 6511 is retracted and immediately after the ball stopped on the upper side falls, if the subsequent ball reaches the end of the continuous passage groove 6314 on the stop portion 6314b2 side, the ball enters the upper discharge hole 5314a1. There is a possibility that the vehicle will be guided to the stop 6314b2 following the previous ball.

  However, in this embodiment, after the previous sphere starts to flow down the stop portion 6314b2, the upper movable plate is formed before a space for one sphere is formed on the upper side (0.2 seconds to 0.3 seconds elapses). The upper movable plate 6511 is controlled in an operation mode in which the 6511 is in a protruding state (see FIG. 50). Thus, while the upper movable plate 6511 maintains the retracted state, the ball that has previously entered the stopping portion 6314b2 prevents the following ball from entering the stopping portion 6314b2, so that the pair of balls It is possible to prevent the balls from entering the stopping portion 6314b2 in a row. That is, in the chain opening period T62a, it is possible to prevent the spheres from flowing down to the stopping portion 6314b2 immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the center of the sphere P62 to pass through the upper movable plate 6511 (after entering the stop portion 6314b2) and pass through the lower movable plate 6512 (discharged from the stop portion 6314b2). The flow path resistance of the retaining portion 6314b is set so that NTb falls within 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds. Hereinafter, an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 will be described.

  FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512. The drive device 6520 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the pair of movable plate portions 6510 are operated in a fixed operation pattern illustrated in FIG. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the movable plate portion 6510 that changes depending on the timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the operation pattern of the movable plate portion 6510 includes an operation during the chain opening period T62a, an operation during the upper closing period T6b following the chain opening period T62a, and both opening following the upper closing period T6b. An operation in the period T6c and an operation in the lower closing period T6d following the both opening periods T6c are configured. The upper closing period T6b, the both opening periods T6c, and the lower closing period T6d are the same as those described above in the sixth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the chain open period T62a, the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 open and close alternately. After the upper movable plate 6511 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after closing), the lower movable plate 6512 retreats from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after opening the continuous passage groove 6314) with a slight delay. In the present embodiment, the upper movable plate 6511 maintains the protruding state for 3 seconds after maintaining the retracted state for 0.2 seconds (a time during which one sphere can pass but it is difficult for two spheres to pass). The second movable plate 6512 is changed to the protruding state at the timing when the upper movable plate 6511 changes to the retracted state, and the protruding state is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, the retracted state is maintained for 0.2 seconds (a time during which one sphere can pass while it is difficult for two spheres to pass), and the operation is controlled in a manner to repeat the change to the protruding state, The chain release period T62a is set to 30 seconds.

  According to such an operation mode, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres retained between the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 is two, while the upper movable plate 6511 is the continuous passage groove 6314. The number of spheres passing through the upper movable plate 6511 while retracting from the inside can be limited to one.

  Further, the upper movable plate 6511 retreats from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 and at the same time the lower movable plate 6512 protrudes to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (becomes a protruding state), and then the lower movable plate 6512 is in the retracted state. In addition, 2.8 seconds, which is a period longer than time NTb, elapses. Thereby, it is possible to ensure that the sphere that has passed through the upper movable plate 6511 is stopped above the lower movable plate 6512, and it is possible to prevent the sphere from passing through.

  In addition, since the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the protruding state for 2.6 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the protruding state, the ball P62 is formed immediately before the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state. Even when it passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters the stopping portion 6314b2), the ball P62 can be reliably maintained on the upper side of the lower movable plate 6512 for at least 2.6 seconds.

  Thereby, the ball P62 passes through the stopping portion 6314b2 (flows without stopping on the upper side of the lower moving plate 6512) regardless of the timing at which the ball P62 passes through the upper moving plate 6511 (enters the stopping portion 6314b2). ) Can be prevented.

  Further, after the sphere is stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511, the stopped ball enters the stopping portion 6314b2 as the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state, and then the lower movable plate 6512. 3 seconds (the fluctuation period that is easy to select when the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4 (the shortest fluctuation period)) before it flows down and passes through the second detection port 5314c as it enters the retracted state. It takes a long time. Accordingly, when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c through the stopping device 6500b, the ball passes through the first winning port 64 (the detection ball in the first winning port 64 (for example, the second detection port 5314c) passes. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lottery opportunity).

  In the upper closing period T6b, two balls are inserted into the continuous passage groove 6314, whereby the second ball enters the branch channel 5314d through the upper discharge hole 5314a, and the third detection port 5314e. Pass through. Thereby, compared to the case described in the sixth embodiment, it is possible to reduce the number of balls that need to enter the continuous passage groove 6314 in order to create a situation where the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e. Can easily pass through the third detection port 5314e.

  In the both open periods T6c and the lower closed period T6d, the state of the continuous passage groove 6314 is the same as the both open periods T6c and the lower closed period T6d in the sixth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, unlike the sixth embodiment, when a plurality of spheres are guided to the continuous passage groove 6314 in the lower closing period T6b, then, when the transition is made to the chain opening period T62a, two spheres are accommodated in the stopping portion 6314b2. In this state, the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 in the chain opening period T62a is started.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the period during which the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the retracted state during the chain opening period T62a is 0.2 seconds (one sphere can pass, but it is difficult to pass two spheres). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a plurality (two in this embodiment) of the spheres that have stopped at the stopping portion 6314b from passing through the second detection port 5314c in succession.

  That is, the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c one ball at a time in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 in the chain opening period T62a. As a result, when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c via the stopping device 6500b, the ball passes the overflow at the first winning port 64 (the detection port in the first winning port 64 (for example, the second detection port 5314c)). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lottery opportunity in spite of having passed.

  Therefore, for example, as a look-ahead effect in the lower closing period T6d, a little before the lower closing period T6d starts, the 3rd symbol display device 81 “5 balls + 1 in the first winning opening 64 for 5 seconds + 1” If it can be inserted, the message “Electric role 640a is open? (High difficulty, high security)” is displayed.

  As a result, a special profit can be obtained by allowing the player to continuously enter the ball into the first winning opening 64, but the difficulty level for obtaining the special profit is increased (the ball can be continuously entered). While the required number is large), it should be notified that the level of peace of mind that the profits given to the player (the number of winning balls and the chance of lottery) are secured by the continuously entering balls is high. Can do. Thereby, the interest with respect to the frequency with which the ball enters the first winning opening 64 can be increased, and the player can be prevented from casually launching the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the continuous opening period T62a (30 seconds), the upper closing period T6b (6 seconds), both opening periods T6c (6 seconds), and the lower closing period T6d (8 seconds) are arranged in order, and 50 seconds Drive device 6520 is driven and controlled to loop at intervals.

  Accordingly, the stopping device 6500 operates in an operation mode corresponding to the continuous open period T62a for more than half of the operating time, and during that time, the balls are discharged from the stopping portion 6314b one by one and pass through the second detection port 5314c. It is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol by using the trigger as a trigger (while making the first special symbol variable display easy to execute), and at other times, the first special symbol 64 A period (upper closing period T6b, lower closing period T6d) in which normal symbols can be displayed using a part of the ball, and a period in which normal symbols cannot be displayed (both open periods T6c). Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to realize a clear gaming property, and it is possible to realize a favorite gaming property by adjusting the timing of launch by the player.

  That is, for example, when it is desired to enter a ball into the first winning opening 64 specially for executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the ball toward the first winning opening 64 only during the chain release period T62a. May be launched, and during other periods (T6b to T6d), the launch of the sphere may be stopped and attention may be paid to the effects of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a ball that has entered the first winning port 64 passes through the third detection port 5314e.

  On the other hand, for example, when it is desired to obtain an ordinary symbol variation display opportunity at the expense of the first special symbol variation display opportunity, the first winning award is set with an aim at the upper closing period T6b and the lower closing period T6d. It is also possible to fire a sphere toward the mouth 64 and stop launching the sphere during other periods (T62a and T6c), and pay attention to the effects of the third symbol display device 81. This increases the possibility of passing through the third detection port 5314e when a ball continuously enters the first winning port 64, as compared to the case where the ball is always launched toward the first winning port 64. Can do.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the stopping device 5500 is disposed on the downstream side of the introduction groove 5314a has been described. However, the delay device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is provided between the introduction groove 5314a and the second detection port 5314c. The stopping device 5500 is not provided. That is, unlike the fifth embodiment, the sphere that has passed through the introduction groove 5314a passes through the second detection port 5314c without stopping. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of a delay device 7300 in the seventh embodiment. In FIG. 51, the balls P71 and P72 continuously enter the winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 6300 are configured as symmetrical devices with the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals as those in the description are given, and the description of the same parts as those in the third embodiment is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the delay device 7300 includes a main body member 7310 having a flow path for guiding a ball that has entered the first winning port 64 to the detection port 312d, and an action of the ball that flows down inside the main body member 7310. When the stop device 3340 changes its state due to the state, and when the stop device 3340 changes to the change state (see FIG. 51), the state is maintained and stopped as the posture changes due to the action of the sphere that has passed through the detection port 312d. And a maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state of the device 3340.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the main body member 7310 forms a downwardly inclined flow path and guides a ball entered from the first winning port 64 to a position vertically above the detection port 312d, and its first groove 5311. From the middle position of the second groove 5312, the second groove 5312 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, the post-detection flow path 5313 for guiding the sphere passing through the detection port 312d, and the second groove 5312. And a continuous passage groove 7314 formed as a groove branched to the side (right side in FIG. 51).

  The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the post-detection flow path 5313 and the continuous passage groove 7314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is formed in the game board 13 in the assembled state. By being closed, a passage through which the sphere flows down is formed.

  Note that the first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, and the post-detection flow path 5313 are symmetrical to the configuration of the same name (the first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, and the post-detection flow path 3313) in the third embodiment. Therefore, the description overlapping with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

  In the second groove 5312, the side wall portion 312e extends to the detection port 312d. Between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e, a continuous passage groove 7314 that forms a branch passage capable of sending a ball is disposed.

  The continuous passage groove 7314 of the delay device 7300 includes a vertical extending groove 7314b connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and a second detection port 5314c is disposed at the lower end of the vertical extending groove 7314b.

  The vertically extending groove 7314b is configured as a groove portion extending in the vertical direction and allowing a sphere to flow down. In the present embodiment, the length of the vertical extending groove 7314b is designed to have a length that requires 1 second for the sphere to pass (freely fall) through the vertical extending groove 7314b.

  Next, game play in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the detection port 312d (starts winning), the first symbol display device 37 performs the variable display of the first special symbol, using that as a trigger, and two prize balls When the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c (starts winning prize), the first special symbol display device 37 executes the variable display of the second special symbol and uses the four symbols as a trigger. Prize balls are paid out.

  That is, after the ball P71 has entered the first winning opening 64, the ball P72 has a sufficient time interval (a time interval of about 4 seconds or more) to return the stop device 3340 to the initial state. When the ball enters 64, since the ball enters only the detection port 312d, the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. On the other hand, if the ball P72 enters the first winning opening 64 while the stop device 3340 maintains the change state (for about 4 seconds or less), the follower ball P72 enters the second detection opening 5314c. Thus, the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot distribution is performed so that the jackpot of the second special symbol can obtain the profit larger than the jackpot of the first special symbol (the jackpot allocation is easier to obtain a larger profit). ). Thereby, the profit given to the player at the time of big hit may change depending on whether the balls P71 and P72 enter the first winning opening 64 with a sufficient interval or a short interval. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the ball entering the first winning opening 64.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol is configured to be variably displayed in preference to the first special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured not to be variably displayed at the same time. Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol is always started before the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the variability display of the second special symbol having a high degree of attention for the player from starting immediately after the ball has passed through the second detection port 5314c. That is, when the sphere P72 passes through the second detection port 5314c, the variation display period of the first special symbol that has already been executed due to the passage of the sphere P71 through the detection port 312d is changed to the second special symbol. This can be used as a waiting time until the variable display is started.

  Therefore, after a rare event that the balls P71 and P72 continuously enter the first winning opening 64 occurs, the fluctuation display on the side advantageous to the player (the jackpot distribution is the first special for the player). It is possible to secure a time until the start of the variation of the second special symbol which is more advantageous than the symbol) (a waiting period can be inserted).

  Therefore, the third symbol display device is caused by the time when attention is paid to the flow of the balls P71 and P72 that have entered the first winning port 64 and the passage of the balls P71 and P72 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c. Of the variable display performed in 81, the time during which the variable display on the side advantageous to the player (second special symbol) is performed can be clearly divided. This eliminates the need for the player to quickly move his / her eyes between the first winning port 64 and the third symbol display device 81, thereby reducing the player's feeling of fatigue.

  In addition, after allowing the player to confirm that the ball P72 has passed through the second detection port 5314c, it is possible to start the display of variation resulting from the passage of the ball P72 through the second detection port 5314c.

  Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine in which a variation display of the first special symbol and a variation display of the second special symbol are alternately generated, the ball has passed through the second detection port 5314c, which is advantageous for the player. It can be made easier for the player to grasp that the variation display of the second special symbol is started as a series of flows.

  Thereby, the player can easily grasp that the next variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is the variable display on the side advantageous to the player (second special symbol). it can.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the delay device 300 is connected to the downstream side of the first winning port 64 has been described. However, the delay device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is connected to the downstream side of the V winning device 800. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 52 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. With reference to FIG. 52, the structure of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, in contrast to the above-described embodiments, the second winning port 640 and the electric accessory 640a are provided below the first winning port 64, and the V winning device 800 is replaced with the first variable winning device 65. A first variable winning device 8065 in the present embodiment (a device having the same function as the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment) is provided in the lower portion of the V winning device 800, and a ball is rolled on the upper surface. A rolling plate 8091 which is formed as a movable overhanging plate and discharges the rolling ball to the upper part of the electric combination 640 a when the electric combination 640 a is in an open state is provided on the right side of the second winning opening 640. Is different.

  Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. It is also possible to provide a warp passage opening 87 through which a part of the spheres flowing down to the left of the center frame 86 flows into the delay bed device 400 (through a so-called “warp flow path”). The form is the same.

  The V winning device 800 is different in that the delay device 8300 is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each of the above-described embodiments, and the other points have the same structure.

  The first variable winning device 8065 operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by operation of a solenoid (not shown) (one of the solenoids 209). The first variable winning device 8065 does not guide the ball to the specific winning opening 65a (does not enter the ball) by performing an extension operation (closing operation) forward, while retracting backward (opening operation). By doing so, it works to guide the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  The ball that has reached the first variable winning device 8065 but has not been guided to the specific winning port 65a because the first variable winning device 8065 is closed is connected to the left of the first variable winning device 8065. Rolls on the rolling surface and reaches the upper surface of the rolling plate 8091.

  The rolling plate 8091 is inclined downward as it goes to the left in front view. For this reason, the sphere that has reached the rolling plate 8091 rolls its upper surface leftward in a front view and is discharged from the left end.

  The ball discharged from the left end portion of the rolling plate 8091 falls downward and is discharged from the outlet 71 if the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (see FIG. 52). On the other hand, if the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the electric accessory 640a rolls on the upper surface (inner surface) of the electric accessory 640a and is guided to enter the second winning opening 640.

  On the right side of the V winning opening 800a, similarly to the specific winning opening 65a of the first embodiment described above, a front-opening triangular opening / closing plate covering the V winning opening 800a, and opening / closing on the right side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis A V inlet solenoid (one of the solenoids 209) for driving is provided, and the V winning opening 800a is normally closed so that a ball cannot win or is difficult to win. When the lottery accompanying the winning of the second winning opening 640 is a small hit, the V inlet solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the right, and an open state in which the ball is likely to win the V winning opening 800a is temporarily set. Act to form.

  A delay device 8300 is provided as a device that forms a flow path through which a ball that has entered the V winning device 800 passes. The V winning device 800 is provided with a V winning port 800a. When a game ball enters the V winning port 800a, the game ball is detected and a predetermined game is given to the player. A ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out. That is, the V winning opening 800a is a detection opening that also serves as a detection sensor. Also, the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a passes a V winning switch 8315d, which will be described later, so that a big hit game is awarded.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the function in the first embodiment, the detection port 312d functions not as a detection port that performs detection with lottery but as a detection port that purely detects the passage of a sphere. That is, the number of spheres detected by the V winning opening 800a and the number of spheres detected by the detection opening 312d are collated, and if an abnormality is recognized in the difference between the numbers, control is performed so that an error notification is performed. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make a hole in the range of the front side of the branch delay groove 8314 of the glass unit 16 and to easily find a fraud in which a sphere is directly inserted into the branch delay groove 8314 from the front side.

  A first variable winning device 8065 is provided below the V winning device 800. The first variable winning device 8065 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) in the jackpot game, and when a gaming ball enters the first variable winning device 8065a, a predetermined game ball (for example, 15 balls) are paid out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the configuration of the delay device 8300 in which the ball passing through the V winning opening 800a flows down will be described. FIG. 53 is a partial front view of the delay device 8300. Since the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 8300 have the same configuration as the device of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals as those in the third embodiment are given, and the third embodiment Description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the delay device 8300 includes a main body member 8310 that causes the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a to flow down, and a stop device 3340 that changes state due to the action of the ball that flows down inside the main body member 8310. A maintenance device 3360 that maintains the state of the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 enters a change state and releases the maintenance of the state of the stop device 3340 as the posture changes due to the action of a sphere flowing down inside, will be described later. And a stopping device 8500 that acts on the sphere flowing down the side groove 8315 and stops the sphere.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the main body member 8310 forms a downwardly inclined flow path and guides a ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a, and a vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311. A second groove 3312 extending in the direction from the lower end of the second groove 3312, a slanted channel 8313 extending in a direction that slopes downward to the right, and a side from an intermediate position of the second groove 3312 (see FIG. 53 left) and is extended vertically downward from a region including a branch delay groove 8314 that rejoins the lower end of the second groove 3312 and a lower bottom opening 8313b of the inclined channel 8313. And a side-by-side groove 8315 configured by a pair of grooves side by side.

  Note that the first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, the inclined flow path 8313, the branch delay groove 8314, and the side groove 8315 have a groove shape having an open part on the game board 13 side, and in the assembled state, the open part is a game. By being closed by the board 13, a passage through which the sphere flows down is formed.

  The position where the branch delay groove 8314 is connected to the second groove 3312 is formed to be the same as the position where the accommodation recess 3312f is disposed in the third embodiment. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 53), the sphere that has reached the stop device 3340 (the leading ball, the sphere P81 in FIG. 53) is rotated vertically while changing the stop device 3340. While flowing down and being guided to the inclined flow path 8313, the sphere that has reached the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the changing state (the second and subsequent balls, the ball P82 in FIG. 53) is a branch delay groove. Flow down 8314.

  The inclined channel 8313 is a channel that is formed as a straight channel that is inclined downward as it goes rightward, and that extends to a point where the sphere abutting on the abutting portion 3363 further advances by one sphere. (When the two spheres stay from the extended end, the second sphere counting from the extended end is a flow path in contact with the contact portion 3363), and the sphere from the extended end. Are connected to the back side of the second sphere counted from the extended end portion, and the communication opening 8313a is an opening through which the sphere can pass, and extends to the communication opening 8313a. A lower bottom opening 8313b that opens downward at a position shifted by one sphere in the installation direction. The inclined flow path 8313 is formed in such a shape that 4 seconds elapse after the sphere passes through the V winning opening 800a and before it flows down the second groove 3312 and reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

  The communication opening 8313a is formed as a flow path extending in a U shape with the end facing the front side. That is, the ball that has entered the connection opening 8313a from the inclined flow path 8313 flows down the U-shaped flow path of the communication opening 8313a and is discharged to the upper end portion of the second groove 8315b. Thereafter, the sphere flows down the second groove 8315b.

  Since the branch delay groove 8314 is connected at its lower end to the lower end of the second groove 3312, the ball flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 enters the inclined channel 8313 through the lower end of the second groove 3312 ( Join the flow path where the leading sphere flows down). In the present embodiment, the shape of the branch delay groove 8314 is designed so that the time required for the sphere to pass through the branch delay groove 8314 is 5 seconds or longer.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time required for the ball P81 that has previously entered the V winning opening 800a to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b after entering the V winning opening 800a, and the V winning after the ball P81. There is an interval of 5 seconds between the time required for the ball P82 entering the mouth 800a to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b after entering the V winning opening 800a. As a result, even when a plurality of balls P81 and P82 enter the V winning opening 800a, the timing at which the balls P81 and P82 reach the lower bottom opening 8313b is shifted, and each of the balls P81 and P82 is shifted. It is possible to make it easier for the player to show the dropping operation to the V winning switch 8315d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the spheres P81 and P82 from flowing together and prevent the sphere from flowing too quickly, such as not knowing which ball has passed the V winning switch 8315d.

  The sphere that has passed through the inclined channel 8313 contacts the contact portion 3363 of the maintaining device 3360 and then flows down the side groove 8315. The side groove 8315 is connected to the first groove 8315a extending vertically downward from the lower bottom opening 8313b and the flow path connected to the communication opening 8313a so that the sphere that has passed through the communication opening 8313a can flow down at the upper end. More than the second groove 8315b provided on the left side of the first groove 8315a, the gap 8315c formed as a gap through which the sphere can pass from the first groove 8315a to the second groove 8315b, and the gap 8315c of the first groove 8315a It mainly includes a V winning switch 8315d disposed so that a ball can pass on the downstream side, and a discharge switch 8315e through which the ball flowing down the first groove 8315a or the second groove 8315b passes.

  The sphere flowing down the delay device 8300 is guided to a sphere discharge path (not shown) after passing through the discharge switch 8315e.

  When the sphere that has reached the side groove 8315 does not stay at the bottom bottom opening 8313b, it flows down to the bottom bottom opening 8313b, and then starts to flow along the first groove 8315a.

  On the other hand, when the sphere stays from the lower bottom opening 8313b, it is blocked by the staying sphere and does not flow down to the lower end, and passes along the second groove 8315b via the communication opening 8313a (the speed direction is set to the rear). It starts to flow down. In this manner, the flow path of the sphere that has reached the side groove 8315 can be made different depending on whether or not the sphere is retained starting from the lower bottom opening 8313b. Next, a stopping device 8500 capable of stopping a sphere starting from the lower bottom opening 8313b will be described.

  The stopping device 8500 includes a pair of movable plate portions 8510 and a drive device 8520 configured by a pair of drive solenoids 8521 and 8522 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) that controls the movable plate portion 8510. Is mainly provided.

  The movable plate portion 8510 includes an upper movable plate 8511 that moves into and out of the first groove 8315a at the boundary portion between the lower bottom opening 8313b and the first groove 8315a, and a gap portion 8315c that is downstream of the upper movable plate 8511 and on the downstream side. A lower movable plate 8512 that moves in and out of the first groove 8315a at a position along the lower end side of the first groove 8315a.

  The upper movable plate 8511 regulates the flow of the sphere by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the first groove 8315a is less than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding into the first groove 8315a (the sphere is placed on the upper surface). In the retracted state where the first groove 8315a is retracted outward from the inside of the first groove 8315a, the ball is allowed to flow down.

  The upper movable plate 8511 has an upper surface position that is lower than a lower surface position of the lower bottom opening 8313b. Therefore, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the projecting state, it is possible to prevent the ball on the upper movable plate 8511 from flowing back to the lower bottom opening 8313b and returning (climbing) to the inclined channel 8313 when the ball jumps to the left. it can.

  The lower movable plate 8512 extends in the extending direction of the first groove 8315a of the sphere by projecting to the position where the gap formed in the first groove 8315a is less than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding into the first groove 8315a. The flow along the (vertical direction) is restricted, and the flow along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the first groove 8315a of the sphere is allowed in the retracted state where the flow is retracted outward from the inside of the first groove 8315a.

  The lower movable plate 8512 is formed in a curved shape whose upper surface shape is inclined downward toward the second groove 8315b. Accordingly, it is possible to shorten the period during which the sphere dropped on the upper surface of the lower movable plate 8512 stays on the upper surface of the lower movable plate 8512, and to send the sphere to the second groove 8315b in a short time.

  The lower movable plate 8512 passes through the lower movable plate 8512 (left side, see FIG. 55) after the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state and the ball stopped on the upper movable plate 8511 starts dropping. It is arranged at a position where the time taken to do so is less than 0.1 seconds.

  The driving device 8520 is fastened and fixed to the delay device 8300 and generates a driving force for moving the upper movable plate 8511 in and out, and the driving device 8520 is fastened and fixed to the delay device 8300 and moves the lower movable plate 8512 in and out. And a lower drive solenoid 8522 that generates a drive force.

  In the present embodiment, the upper drive solenoid 8521 is an operation pattern that is set based on the small hit type that is caused by the ball entering the second winning opening 640, and the upper movable plate 8511 is moved. Excited in the manner of moving up and down.

  On the other hand, the lower drive solenoid 8522 is excited in such a manner that the lower movable plate 8512 is moved in and out with a constant operation pattern from the time of power-on. In the present embodiment, as an example, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in a protruding state (a state in which the passage of a sphere is restricted) for 2.5 seconds, and then maintained in a retracted state (a state in which the passage of the sphere is allowed) for 0.5 seconds. The lower drive solenoid 8522 is driven in an operation pattern that repeats this.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the upper movable plate 8511 is driven by the upper drive solenoid 8521 and the lower movable plate 8512 is driven by the lower drive solenoid 8522, the respective operations can be made independent. Hereinafter, an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 will be described.

  FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation mode of each part when a ball entering the V winning opening 800a is detected. In FIG. 54, the waveform is illustrated in such a manner that the timing at which the output pulse of the V winning opening 800a is turned ON indicates the timing at which the ball has passed through the V winning opening 800a.

  The waveform shown as the inclined flow path 8313 is added for easy understanding, and the output pulse rises at the timing when the balls P81 and P82 passing through the V winning opening 800a reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. It is illustrated in a manner (to reach the lower end).

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, after a ball enters the second winning port 640 and hits a small hit, the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds. Thereby, the ball can pass through the V winning opening 800a. In the present embodiment, the shortest variation time of the second winning opening 640 is set to 15 seconds, and the movable member inside the delay device 8300 is driven during the 15 seconds (see FIG. 54).

  FIG. 54 illustrates a case where two balls P81 and P82 have passed through the V winning opening 800a. That is, the spheres P81 and P82 are illustrated as spheres that have passed through the V winning opening 800a with a pitch interval of 1.8 seconds or less. Of the balls that have entered the V winning opening 800a, the ball P81 that has entered at the head changes the stopping device 3340 from the initial state to the changed state, and then flows down the inclined channel 8313. After the stop device 3340 changes to the change state, it takes at least 3 seconds until the maintenance of the state is released by the action of the ball P81, so that the follower ball P82 is in contact with the change state stop device 3340. The ball enters the branch delay groove 8314.

  In this way, the ball P81 that enters at the head and the follower ball P82 flow down through different flow paths and reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. Note that the time required to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b can be defined by the channel shape. In the present embodiment, it takes 4 seconds for the ball P81 to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b after passing through the V winning opening 800a, and the ball P82 is added by the amount flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 (5 seconds). It takes 9 seconds.

  The timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a is limited to the time (1.8 seconds) when the V winning device 800 is opened. Therefore, the first reaching period T81, which is 1.8 seconds starting from 4 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened, and 1.8 seconds starting from 9 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened, is used. In periods other than the second arrival period T82, the balls P81 and P82 cannot reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. In addition, the first arrival period T81 and the second arrival period T82 are separated.

  Thereby, the timing at which the sphere P81 and the sphere P82 flow down the side groove 8315 can be clearly divided. That is, the V winning device 800 is clearly distinguished from the case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on when the ball enters the V winning port 800a during the opening period of the V winning device 800. It is possible to form a case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on whether or not a plurality of balls have entered the V winning opening 800a during the opening period.

  In addition, it is possible to make it easier for the player to show the dropping action of each of the balls P81 and P82 to the V winning switch 8315d. That is, when the balls P81 and P82 flow together toward the V winning switch 8315d, one passes the V winning switch 8315d and the other deviates from the V winning switch 8315d, It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down so that the ball P81 or the ball P82 that has entered afterward has not passed through the V winning switch 8315d.

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 54 is illustrated with the time when the V winning device 800 is opened as the left end. The upper movable plate 8511 is switched to the retracted state at a first opening time T83 after 7 seconds from the opening time of the V winning device 800 and at a second opening time T84 after 12 seconds from the opening time of the V winning device 800, respectively. (Opened) Switched to the protruding state after 1 second (closed). Note that the first release time T83 and the second release time T84 are defined before the ball entry timing, regardless of the ball entry timing to the V winning opening 800a.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the first release time point T83 corresponds to the timing 1.2 seconds after the end of the first arrival period T81, and the second release time point T84 is 1. Corresponds after 2 seconds.

  Therefore, a period until the sphere that has passed through the V winning opening 800a reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b and the arrangement of the spheres is stabilized (for example, a period during which micro-vibration after colliding with the side wall is received, or three or more balls are entered) When there is, it is possible to ensure a period during which the second and subsequent balls are discharged from the communication opening 8313a. Thereby, the sphere can be dropped immediately after the upper movable plate 8511 is brought into the retracted state (the shift between the operation timing of the upper movable plate 8511 and the drop start timing of the sphere can be minimized). ). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an irregular winning from the V winning switch 8315d by causing the ball to flow down in an unintended flow manner.

  With respect to this point, in the present embodiment, the period from when the leading sphere P81 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b until the arrangement of the spheres is stabilized is referred to as the period after the trailing sphere P82 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. It can be shortened compared to the period until the arrangement becomes stable.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, when the leading ball P81 comes into contact with the contact part 3363, the gap between the magnet part 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet part 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 is shortened, and a sufficient attractive force acts. On the other hand, when the follower ball P82 comes into contact with the contact part 3363, the space between the magnet part 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet part 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 is increased and the attractive force becomes weak, so the leading ball P81 Can be larger than the load received by the follower ball P82 from the contact portion 3363.

  Thereby, the load applied to the ball P81 from the contact portion 3363 can be used as a braking force, and the ball P81 can be decelerated in advance before the ball P81 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. Accordingly, the degree of rebound caused by the collision of the sphere P81 with the lower end portion of the inclined channel 8313 can be reduced, and therefore the period until the arrangement of the sphere is stabilized after the sphere P81 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. Therefore, the interval between the end of the first arrival period T81 and the first release time T83 can be set short. This makes it easier to close (switch to the protruding state) the upper movable plate 8511 that has started switching (opening) to the retracted state at the first opening time T83 before the follower ball reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. (With sufficient time).

  On the other hand, since the load (braking force) applied to the ball P82 from the contact portion 3363 is smaller than the load (braking force) applied to the ball P81 from the contact portion 3363, the ball P82 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. After that, the period until the arrangement of the spheres is stabilized can be made longer than that of the sphere P81. Thereby, the freedom degree of the effect performed using the period until arrangement | positioning of the ball | bowl P82 is stabilized can be improved. For example, a long time effect can be performed.

  In the waveform illustrated as the lower movable plate 8512, the operation modes of the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing are illustrated as an example of the opening / closing operation of the lower movable plate 8512 when the V winning device 800 is opened. . Note that the waveforms of the timing charts of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 indicate changes in state, but are simplified as rectangular waves for easy understanding.

  At the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T83. Therefore, if at least one ball has entered the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T83, and the ball entered at the top falls from the lower bottom opening 8313b. Then, it passes through the V winning switch 8315d and then passes through the discharge switch 8315e.

  At the second timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in a protruding state at the first opening time T83 and the second opening time T84. Therefore, since the ball that drops from the lower bottom opening 8313b when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state is guided to the second groove 8315b along the lower movable plate 8512, it does not pass through the V winning switch 8315d and is discharged. Passes through switch 8315e.

  At the third timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the protruding state at the first opening time T83, while the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the second opening time T84. Therefore, when the number of balls that enter the V winning opening 800a is one, the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T83, so that the ball that has entered at the top is released from the lower bottom opening 8313b. Since the ball falls and is guided to the second groove 8315b along the lower movable plate 8512, the ball passes through the discharge switch 8315e without passing through the V winning switch 8315d.

  On the other hand, when there are two or more balls entering the V prize opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state at the second opening time T84, so that the ball falls from the lower bottom opening 8313b, It passes the V winning switch 8315d and then passes the discharge switch 8315e.

  Thereby, it is possible to create a game where the profit given to the player is clearly changed depending on whether one ball or a plurality of balls are inserted into the V winning opening 800a. This is because, when the V winning device 800 is opened, it is defined in advance that the timing to reach the inclined flow path 8313 is included in the first arrival period T81, whether to enter at an early timing or to enter at a late timing. As is clear from this, it is clearly different from the game nature in which the profit given to the player changes depending on the timing of entering the V winning opening 800a.

  According to the playability of the present embodiment, the profit given to the player varies depending on how many balls enter the V winning opening 800a in a single opening operation of the V winning apparatus 800. Therefore, the V winning opening 800a It is possible to improve the attention to the aspect of entering the ball.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the sphere that has reached the lower bottom opening 8313b when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the projecting state is stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 8511 is described. However, the delay device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is A discharge detection port 9313a is provided for discharging the sphere that has reached the lower bottom opening 8313b when the movable plate 8511 is in a protruding state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 55, the configuration of the delay device 9300 in which the ball that has passed through the V winning opening 800a flows down will be described. FIG. 55 is a partial front view of a delay device 9300 in the ninth embodiment. Note that the stopping device 3340 and the maintaining device 3360 in the delay device 9300 have the same configuration as the device of the third embodiment. Therefore, the same reference numerals as those used in the third embodiment are attached, and the third embodiment Description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

  A delay device 9300 is provided as a device that forms a flow path through which a ball that has entered the V winning device 800 passes. The V winning device 800 is provided with a V winning port 800a. When a game ball enters the V winning port 800a, the game ball is detected and a predetermined game is given to the player. A ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out. That is, the V winning opening 800a is a detection opening that also serves as a detection sensor. Also, the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a passes a V winning switch 8315d, which will be described later, so that a big hit game is awarded.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the function in the first embodiment, the detection port 312d functions not as a detection port that performs detection with lottery but as a detection port that purely detects the passage of a sphere. That is, the number of spheres detected by the V winning opening 800a and the number of spheres detected by the detection opening 312d are collated, and if an abnormality is recognized in the difference between the numbers, control is performed so that an error notification is performed. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make a hole in the range of the front side of the branch delay groove 8314 of the glass unit 16 and to easily find a fraud in which a sphere is directly inserted into the branch delay groove 8314 from the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the delay device 9300 flows down the inside of the main body member 9310 in the same manner as the main body member 9310 for flowing down the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a and the delay device 8300 described in the eighth embodiment. Of the stop device 3340 whose state is changed by the action of the moving ball, and when the stop device 3340 is changed, the state is maintained and the posture is changed by the action of the ball flowing down inside. A maintenance device 3360 for canceling the maintenance of the state and a stopping device 8500 for acting on a ball flowing down a side groove 8315 described later and stopping the ball are mainly provided. That is, the delay device 9300 according to the present embodiment is different from the delay device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment only in the main body members 8310 and 9310, and has the same configuration in other portions.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the main body member 9310 includes a first groove 3311, a second groove 3312, a branch delay groove 8314, and a lower bottom opening 8313b that are configured similarly to the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment. And a side groove 8315 that is vertically extended from the included region and that includes a pair of grooves provided on the left and right sides. In addition, the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment is configured differently. The inclined channel 9313 is provided. That is, the main body member 9310 of the present embodiment is different from the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment only in the inclined flow paths 8313 and 9313, and has the same configuration in other portions.

  Note that the first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, the inclined flow path 9313, the branch delay groove 8314, and the side groove 8315 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side. By being closed by the board 13, a passage through which the sphere flows down is formed.

  The inclined flow path 9313 is formed as a straight flow path that slopes downward as it goes to the right starting from the lower end of the second groove 3312, and the spheres that have come into contact with the contact part 3363 have further advanced by two spheres. A flow path extending up to this point (when the three spheres stay from the extended end, the third sphere counting from the extended end contacts the contact portion 3363. A lower bottom opening 8313b disposed at the same position as in the eighth embodiment, and a position shifted by one sphere along the extending direction of the inclined flow path 9313 with respect to the lower bottom opening 8313b ( It mainly includes a discharge detection port 9313a that is open so that a sphere can be guided to the back side (the back side in FIG. 55) at the extended end of the inclined flow path 9313. In addition, the inclined flow path 9313 is formed in a shape in which 4 seconds elapse after the sphere passes through the V winning opening 800a until it flows down the second groove 3312 and reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

  The discharge detection port 9313a is an opening that guides a sphere that has reached the front side thereof (the front side in the direction perpendicular to the sheet of FIG. 55) and guides it to a sphere discharge path (not shown). The discharge detection port 9313a is configured as a switch (a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4)) that detects the passage of a sphere.

  The sphere that has flowed down the inclined channel 9313 and passed through the lower bottom opening 8313b flows down the side groove 8315. In the present embodiment, since the formation of the communication opening 8313a is omitted, the second groove 8315b of the side groove 8315 is formed as a groove for guiding the sphere only through the first groove 8315a.

  That is, the side groove 8315 includes a first groove 8315a extending vertically downward from the bottom opening 8313b, a second groove 8315b provided on the left side of the first groove 8315a, and a second groove from the first groove 8315a. A gap 8315c formed as a gap through which the sphere can pass to 8315b, a V winning switch 8315d arranged so that the sphere can pass downstream from the gap 8315c of the first groove 8315a, and the first groove 8315a or And a discharge switch 8315e through which the sphere flowing down the second groove 8315b passes.

  The sphere that has flowed down the delay device 9300 passes through the discharge switch 8315e and is then guided to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The flow-down mode of the sphere that has reached the lower bottom opening 8313b will be described. First, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in a protruding state when the sphere reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b, the sphere does not stay at the lower bottom opening 8313b and continues to flow along the same flow direction, and the discharge detection port After reaching the near side of 9313a, it passes through the discharge detection port 9313a and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  On the other hand, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in a retracted state when the sphere reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b, the sphere passes through the lower bottom opening 8313b and falls, and is then provided along the first groove 8315a. Flowing down the groove 8315 begins. After the sphere flows down the side groove 8315, it passes through the discharge switch 8315e and is guided to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  As described above, when the sphere flowing down the inclined channel 9313 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b, the subsequent flow path of the sphere can be made different depending on whether the upper movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state or in the retracted state. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the lower drive solenoid 8522 is excited in a manner that causes the lower movable plate 8512 to move in and out with a constant operation pattern from the time of power-on. In this embodiment, as an example different from the eighth embodiment, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in a protruding state (a state in which the passage of a sphere is restricted) for 5.5 seconds, and then in a retracted state (a state in which the passage of the sphere is permitted). ), The lower drive solenoid 8522 is driven in an operation pattern that repeats maintaining for 0.5 seconds. Next, an example of operation modes of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing an example of an operation mode of each part when a ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a is detected. In FIG. 56, the waveform is illustrated in such a manner that the timing at which the output pulse of the V winning opening 800a is turned ON indicates the timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a.

  The waveform shown as the inclined flow path 8313 is added for easy understanding, and the output pulse rises at the timing when the balls P91 and P92 that have passed through the V winning opening 800a reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. Illustrated in an aspect.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, after the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and hits the jackpot, the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds. Thereby, the ball can pass through the V winning opening 800a. FIG. 56 illustrates a case where two balls P91 and P92 have passed through the V winning opening 800a. That is, the spheres P91 and P92 are illustrated as spheres that have passed through the V winning opening 800a with a pitch interval of 1.8 seconds or less.

  Of the balls that have entered the V winning opening 800a, the ball P91 that has entered at the head changes the stopping device 3340 from the initial state to the changed state, and then flows down the inclined channel 9313. After the stop device 3340 changes to the change state, it takes at least 3 seconds (longer than the opening time of the V winning device 800) until the maintenance of the state is released by the action of the ball P91. P92 enters the branch delay groove 8314 while abutting against the changing stop device 3340.

  In this way, the ball P91 that has entered the head and the following ball P92 flow down different flow paths and reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. Note that the time required to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b can be defined by the channel shape. In the present embodiment, the ball P91 takes 4 seconds from passing through the V winning opening 800a to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b, and the ball P92 is added by the amount flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 (5 seconds). It takes 9 seconds.

  The timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a is limited to the time (1.8 seconds) when the V winning device 800 is opened. Therefore, the first reaching period T81, which is 1.8 seconds starting from 4 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened, and 1.8 seconds starting from 9 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened, is used. In a period other than the second arrival period T82, the balls P91 and P92 cannot reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. In addition, the first arrival period T81 and the second arrival period T82 are separated.

  That is, the timing at which the sphere P91 and the sphere P92 reach the lower bottom opening 8313b can be clearly divided. That is, the V winning device 800 is clearly distinguished from the case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on when the ball enters the V winning port 800a during the opening period of the V winning device 800. It is possible to form a case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on whether or not a plurality of balls have entered the V winning opening 800a during the opening period.

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 56 is illustrated with the time when the V winning device 800 is opened as the left end. The upper movable plate 8511 is switched from the projecting state to the retracted state (opened) at the first opening time T93 after 9 seconds have elapsed from the time when the V winning device 800 is opened, and switched from the retracted state to the projecting state after 2 seconds ( Closed). Note that the first opening time T93 is defined from before the ball entry timing regardless of the ball entry timing to the V winning opening 800a.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the first release time T93 corresponds to the start of the second arrival period T82. Therefore, even when the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a when the V winning device 800 is open, the upper movable plate 8511 is kept in the retracted state at the timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. be able to.

  On the other hand, since the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in the protruding state during the period corresponding to the first reaching period T81, when the ball P91 enters the V winning opening 800a while the V winning device 800 is open. Even if it exists, the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in the protruding state at the timing when the ball P91 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the ball P91 that has entered the V winning opening 800a at the beginning from entering the side groove 8315, and the same opening as the opening of the V winning apparatus 800 when the ball P91 has entered the V winning opening 800a. The ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a after the ball P91 that has entered the V winning opening 800a can be guided to the side groove 8315. As a result, during the single opening of the V winning device 800, the ball P91 during the same opening as the opening is compared with the profit given to the player by the ball P91 that entered the V winning opening 800a at the head. After that, a gaming machine having a greater profit given to the player by the ball P92 entering the V winning opening 800a can be configured. In other words, it is possible to constitute a gaming machine that prevents the ball P91 from passing the V winning switch 8315d and allows the ball P92 to pass the V winning switch 8315d.

  For this purpose, it is necessary to avoid that the sphere P91 collides with the extended end of the inclined flow path 9313 and bounces back to return the sphere P91 to the lower bottom opening 8313b. In the present embodiment, since the ball P91 can be decelerated by the braking action caused by the contact (rubbing) between the ball P91 and the contact portion 3363, even when the ball P91 flows vigorously through the inclined flow path 9313. The ball P91 can be prevented from colliding with the extended end of the inclined flow path 9313 and bounced back to the lower bottom opening 8313b. Therefore, the setting range of the inclination angle of the inclined flow path 9313 is set so that the speed of the sphere flowing down the inclined flow path 9313 increases until the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane becomes larger (until the contact angle 3363 is reached). Side).

  The braking action of the sphere P91 utilizes the contact between the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 disposed to release the maintenance of the stop device 3340 in the changed state and the ball P91. This is not a new addition of the braking device. That is, in the present embodiment, the maintenance device 3360 can be used both for switching the state of the stop device 3340 and for decelerating the ball P91.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the deceleration action that occurs in the follower sphere P92, compared to the deceleration action that occurs in the leading ball P91 due to the contact with the contact portion 3363.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, when the leading ball P91 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the gap between the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 is shortened, and sufficient attraction force works. On the other hand, when the follower ball P92 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the gap between the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 is increased and the attractive force becomes weak, so the leading ball P91 Can be larger than the load received by the follower ball P92 from the contact portion 3363.

  Therefore, while sufficiently decelerating the sphere P91, the degree of deceleration of the sphere P92 can be suppressed compared to the degree of deceleration of the sphere P91. Thereby, the flow of the inclined flow path 9313 of the sphere P92 can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction from the player who follows the flow of the sphere P92.

  For example, when the degree of deceleration of the sphere P92 by the contact portion 3363 is large, when the sphere flowing down the inclined channel 9313 starts to contact the contact portion 3363, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state, While the ball is in contact with the contact portion 3363 and decelerated, an event that the lower movable plate 8512 is in a protruding state is likely to occur. In this case, the player has no basis such as “Wouldn't it be difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 8315d by generating wind inside and intentionally decelerating the ball P92?”. The speculation was easy to spread, and there was a risk of diminishing the player's willingness to play.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball P92 that can enter the side groove 8315 is in contact with the contact part 3363 as compared to the ball P91 that cannot enter the side groove 8315. Since the degree of deceleration can be reduced, the flow of the sphere P92 in the vicinity of the abutting portion 3363 can be smoothed, and the possibility that unfounded speculation spreads can be reduced.

  In addition, when the leading ball P91 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363 and the gap between the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 is increased, the contact portion 3363 moves upward with the shaft portion 3361a as an axis. Rotate towards Thereafter, the contact portion 3363 again descends to the position shown in FIG. 55 due to gravity, but the time taken to reach the state shown in FIG. 55 varies depending on the weight balance of the maintenance device 3360 and the like. That is, the lighter the contact portion 3363 is, the longer it takes to reach the state shown in FIG.

  Here, if the ball P92 passes below the contact portion 3363 before the state shown in FIG. 55 is reached after the contact portion rotates upward, the ball P92 contacts the contact portion 3363. Since it is not decelerated and is not decelerated, it is possible to flow down the path to the lower bottom opening 8313b purely according to the shape of the flow path (without decelerating for other special reasons). In this case, it is possible to easily set the period until the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

  Accordingly, in the single opening of the V winning device 800, the balls P92 and P92 are separated from each other immediately after opening and immediately before closing and pass through the V winning opening 800a. In the case of passing through the V winning opening 800a, the period until the ball P92 reaches below the contact portion 3363 after the contact portion 3363 rotates upward by contact with the ball P91 can be shortened. In this case, since it is easy to create a situation where the ball P92 flows down without contacting the contact portion 3363, the timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b (9 seconds after entering the V winning opening 800a) ) Can be easily set by the shape of the flow path of the main body member 9310.

  Therefore, when the drive control of the stopping device 8500 is performed in consideration of the timing (see FIG. 56), the ball P92 and the ball P91 are made to enter the V winning opening 800a continuously with the ball P91. The maximum profit (ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d) that is given to the player by the ball P92, compared to the case where the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a at intervals (maximum of about 1.8 seconds). Can be easily acquired by the player.

  In the waveform illustrated as the lower movable plate 8512, the operation modes of the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing are illustrated as an example of the opening / closing operation of the lower movable plate 8512 when the V winning device 800 is opened. . Note that the waveforms of the timing charts of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 indicate changes in state, but are simplified as rectangular waves for easy understanding.

  At the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in the protruding state for 2 seconds from the first opening time T93, that is, in a period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls that have entered the V winning opening 800a, the balls are prevented from passing the V winning switch 8315d, and the balls that have deviated from the V winning switch 8315d pass the discharge switch 8315e.

  At the second timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is protruded until the end of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, and the lower movable plate 8512 is in the vicinity of the end of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Switch to the evacuation state. Therefore, the closer the timing at which the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a is closer to the timing at which the V winning device 800 is switched to the closed state, the easier the ball P92 flows down the first groove 8315a in the retracted state of the lower movable plate 8512. , The benefits given to the player will increase.

  At the third timing, since the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T93, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the protruding state at least in the second half of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Maintained. Therefore, the closer the timing at which the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a is closer to the timing at which the V winning device 800 is switched to the open state, the easier the ball P92 flows down the first groove 8315a in the retracted state of the lower movable plate 8512. , The benefits given to the player will increase.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, only the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a after the ball P91 can reach the lower bottom opening 8313b of the inclined channel 9313 when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. The timing at which the ball P92 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b and falls (counting back, the timing at which the ball enters the V winning opening 800a) and the timing at which the lower movable plate 8512 enters the retracted state match well. Thus, it is possible to create a situation where the ball P92 passes the V winning switch 8315d.

  That is, the condition for passing the ball through the V winning switch 8315d is that two or more balls pass through the V winning opening 800a in the single opening operation of the V winning device 800, and the second ball is V-winned in a timely manner. Two points can be used for passing through the mouth 800a.

  Thereby, it is possible to create a game where the profit given to the player is clearly changed depending on whether one ball or a plurality of balls are inserted into the V winning opening 800a. According to the playability of the present embodiment, the profit given to the player varies depending on how many balls enter the V winning opening 800a in a single opening operation of the V winning apparatus 800. Therefore, the V winning opening 800a It is possible to improve the attention to the aspect of entering the ball. On the premise of this playability, an example of an effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 52) will be described as an effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit.

  In the third symbol display device 81, various effects related to the magnitude of the jackpot expectation are executed in conjunction with the variable display. Here, the magnitude of the big hit expectation refers to the probability of the ball passing through the V winning opening 800a passing through the V winning switch 8315d.

  For example, when the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in the protruding state when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, so that the ball P92 can pass the V winning switch 8315d. Sex is extremely low. Accordingly, in this case, in this embodiment, for example, characters such as “Don't expect” or “Send off this time” are displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player has excessive expectations. It is controlled by the MPU 221 so as not to notify. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be based on a sound emitted from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, an extremely short sound, a sound of a negative image or the like), or from the lamp display device 227. It may be emitted light (for example, blue light emission may be generated in a setting where the degree of expectation increases as the color changes from blue, green, and red), or a movable mechanism near the third symbol display device 81 May be arranged, and may be based on the operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in the operation mode in which the intensity of the motion is provided with the intensity, the intensity may be reduced).

  On the other hand, when the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the second timing and the case where the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the third timing, ideally, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state in either case. Since the ball P92 can reach the lower bottom opening 8313b, the ball P92 may pass through the V winning switch 8315d. However, in this embodiment of game play in which the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a as a follow-up passes through the V winning switch 8315d, there is a clear difference in the jackpot expectation.

  In this embodiment, as in the conventional model, the ball launch interval is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, and from the arrangement of the V winning opening 800a shown in FIG. This is because the period until entering the ball does not change greatly for each ball. As long as the firing interval is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, it takes about 0.6 seconds for the ball to enter the V winning opening 800a, so the ball immediately after the V winning device 800 is opened. It becomes difficult for P92 to pass through the V winning opening 800a.

  That is, the big hit expectation is higher when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing than when it operates at the third timing. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, a notification indicating that the big hit expectation degree is large is performed, while when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the third timing. Is controlled by the MPU 221 so as to make a notification indicating that the degree of expectation of jackpot is medium as a lively.

  For example, in the case where the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, in this embodiment, a character such as “Large chance” or “Let ’s catch up” is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, so that the player Is controlled by the MPU 221 so as to make a notification of having a big hit expectation. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be based on a sound emitted from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, a sound of a long version of an image song of the model or a sound of a very common plus image may be emitted). The light emitted from the lamp display device 227 may be used (for example, red emission may be generated in a setting in which the degree of expectation increases as the color changes from blue, green, and red). A movable mechanism may be disposed in the vicinity of the display device 81 and may be based on an operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in an operation mode in which the intensity of motion is provided with a strength level, the strength may be increased).

  On the other hand, for example, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the third timing, in this embodiment, characters such as “something” or “not sure until the end” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 221 is controlled so as to notify the player of some expectation. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be based on a sound emitted from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, a sound of a short version of an image song of the model or a sound of a very common intermediate image may be emitted). The light emitted from the lamp display device 227 may be used (for example, green light emission may be generated in a setting in which the degree of expectation increases as the color changes from blue, green, and red). A movable mechanism may be disposed in the vicinity of the display device 81, and may be based on an operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in an operation mode in which the intensity of movement is provided with strength and weakness, the intensity may be moderate). .

  It should be noted that at another operation timing (fourth timing not shown) of the lower movable plate 8512, a timing at which the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the second timing and a timing at which the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the third timing. During this time, the lower movable plate 8512 is in a retracted state.

  In this case, there is a possibility that the ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d due to the ball P92 entering at an intermediate timing while the V winning device 800 is opened. On the other hand, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, the ball P92 is disposed on the upper side of the open / close plate of the open V winning device 800, and it is not known when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a. Even if it exists, since the ball P92 can be forced to enter the V winning opening 800a by the operation of the opening / closing plate accompanying the switching of the V winning apparatus 800 to the closed state, the operation timing of the V winning apparatus 800 can be used. Thus, it is possible to easily form a situation in which the ball P92 passes the V winning switch 8315d.

  Therefore, as another example (or example of addition) of the notification described above, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, the operation timing at which the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Among them, it is set as a case where the degree of expectation for jackpot is the largest, and notification corresponding thereto may be performed.

  For example, as another example of the case where the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, in the present embodiment, characters such as “confirm big hit !?” and “congratulations” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 221 is controlled to notify the player of the maximum jackpot expectation. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be based on sound emitted from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, sound of a definite sound of the model may be emitted) or light emitted from the lamp display device 227. Good (for example, the degree of expectation increases as the color changes from blue, green, and red, and rainbow colors may be emitted in a setting where the rainbow color is determined to be a jackpot), and the third symbol display device 81 A movable mechanism may be disposed in the vicinity, and may be based on an operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in an operation mode in which the intensity of movement is provided with strength and weakness, the intensity may be the strongest).

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the projecting portion 321a1 is provided on the slide moving member 321 and protrudes to the inside of the first groove 311 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the slide moving member 321 is provided with a pair of wall portions that form an S-shaped path, and an S-shaped path in which a sphere flows down inside the first groove 311 is created when the slide moving member 321 moves. You may comprise. In this case, since the path itself through which the sphere flows can be lengthened by the pair of wall portions, the deceleration effect can be maintained over a long period of time compared to the case where the protruding portion 321a1 reduces the deceleration effect due to wear. . Further, the slide moving member 321 may be configured in such a manner that a region where the protruding portion 321a1 is formed and a region where an S-shaped path is formed are connected.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the protruding portion 321a1 projecting inward of the first groove 311 is moved by the kinetic energy of the sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the protruding portion 321a1 is moved by the driving force of the drive motor that is always in constant operation and protrudes to the inner side of the first groove 311 (a state in which the degree of deceleration is large), and the state in which it is retracted from the first groove 311 (A state in which the degree of deceleration is small) may be switched (may function as a constant speed reduction device). In this case, the degree of deceleration of the sphere flowing down the first groove 311 can be changed depending on the drive pattern of the drive motor.

  Further, the above-described decelerating device having a constant operation may be disposed in the post-detection flow path 5313 in the fifth embodiment, for example. In this case, since the period required for the sphere that has passed through the detection port 312d to pass through the post-detection flow path 5313 can be changed depending on the state of the reduction gear, the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. Variations can be made in the period. More specifically, when the speed reducer is in a state of being retracted from the post-detection flow path 5313 (same as the state of the post-detection flow path 5313 alone), it is necessary for the sphere that has passed the detection port 312d to pass through the post-detection flow path 5313. Compared to the period, it is possible to lengthen the period required for the sphere that has passed through the detection port 312d to pass through the post-detection flow path 5313 when the speed reducer projects inward of the post-detection flow path 5313. Therefore, the state of the reduction gear when the ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d changes depending on the timing at which the ball P51 enters the first winning port 64, and the ball P51 passes through the post-detection flow path 5313. Since the period changes, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns for the period during which the stopping device 3340 is maintained in the changed state depending on the timing at which the ball P51 enters the first winning port 64.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the protruding portion 321a1 of the speed reduction device 320 projects upward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise in the aspect from which the convex part 321a1 protrudes inside the 1st groove | channel 311 toward the downward direction, or the aspect in which the convex part 311a1 protrudes inside the 1st groove | channel 311 toward the front side. In this case, it is possible to prevent the slide moving member 321 from moving outward of the first groove 311 with the weight of the sphere.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the balls P1 and P2 are configured to be distributed even when the balls P1 and P2 enter the distribution device 340 in the initial state has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, before the balls reach the sorting device 340, an interval load means is provided to ensure the interval between consecutive balls, and after a while after the balls enter the sorting device 340, the state of the sorting device 340 You may comprise in the aspect from which changes. In this case, since it is not necessary to strictly manage the timing of the state change of the distribution device 340, the distribution device 340 can be supported loosely, and the load required for the state change can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the portion of the sorting device 340 that collides with the sphere is configured with an arc shape (the arc wall portion 343) is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may comprise from the flat plate-shaped part of the part corresponding to the circular arc wall part 343. In this case, when a ball enters the sorting device 340 while the sorting device 340 is returning to the initial state, the sorting device 340 is rotated by a load applied from the ball and returned to the changed state. Thereby, the period during which the sorting device 340 is maintained in the change state can be extended.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 340 is caused to return by changing the center of gravity has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 340 is returned using a product whose urging force changes depending on the moving direction (a moving resistance is applied only in one direction) or a cylinder product whose moving resistance is changed for each direction using an orifice. It may be operated. In this case, maintainability can be improved by using a commercially available product. In addition, by configuring the rotational resistance of the rotating shaft of the sorting device 340 in a manner that is small in the forward rotation and large in the reverse rotation, a constant biasing force is applied to the sorting device 340, so that the returning operation of the sorting device 340 takes time. Delays can occur.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere that has flowed from the fan-shaped member 410 to the inflow port 435 is guided through the delay flow path 436 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when another floor surface is formed below the inflow port 435 (by forming a floor on which the sphere can roll in two stages), the sphere that has flowed into the inflow port 435 from the fan-shaped member 410 again becomes the floor. You may comprise in the aspect which rolls a surface and enters into the 1st winning opening 64. In this case, since the period during which the ball rolls on the floor surface can be extended, it is possible to extend the period during which the player pays attention to the movement of the ball and stops the launch of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to digest the change in the winnings that have been held during that time, and to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the fan-shaped member 410 is tilted in a state where the rotation axis is aligned in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may make it tilt in the state which put the rotating shaft along the front-back direction. In this case, the sphere can be dropped toward the first prize opening 64 along the inclination of the arc portion of the fan-shaped member 410 (the position in the left-right direction can be corrected).

  Although the case where the fan-shaped member 410 operates with the weight of a sphere has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the fan-shaped member 410 may be configured to be electrically operated in a certain repetitive operation mode. In this case, a plurality of types of combinations of operations of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 can be configured. For example, the front fan-shaped member 410 is in a raised position and the rear fan-shaped member 410 is in a lying position, and the front fan-shaped member 410 is in a raised position and a rear fan-shaped The state in which the member 410 is raised, the state in which the front fan-shaped member 410 is laid down, the state in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is laid down, and the state in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side lies down. And a state in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is raised up can be configured, and the number of combinations of the states of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 can be increased.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are configured from the same shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as compared with the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side, the fan-shaped member on the back side may be configured to have a shape in which the width in the left-right direction is increased. In this case, the action (push-back action) associated with the inclination of the fan-shaped member is also applied to the sphere disposed at a position above the fan-shaped member on the back side at a position separated from the center position in the left-right direction of the fan-shaped member 410. Can be generated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the outlet of the delay channel 436 is displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the first winning port 64 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the delay flow path 436 below the pair of left and right inlets 435 may merge at the center of the left and right, and the outlet thereof may be disposed directly above the first prize winning port 64. In this case, it is possible to improve the rate at which balls discharged from the outlet of the delay channel 436 to the game area enter the first winning port 64.

  In the first embodiment, the initial state and the change state of the distribution device 340 have been described as one of the postures that the distribution device 340 takes, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the initial state is a posture in which a ball that has reached the sorting device 340 is received by the first wall portion 341, and the changed state is a posture in which the ball that has reached the sorting device 340 is sent to the third groove 313. The state may be defined by the function of the distribution device 340. In the first embodiment, the sphere can be received by the first wall portion 341 only in the initial state of the sorting device 340, and the sphere that has reached the sorting device 340 between the initial state and the changed state is exclusively the third groove 313. Even if the definition of the initial state and the change state is performed by the function or as one of the postures, the sorting device 340 is changed to the change state. The time required to return from the initial state to the initial state can be made the same. The same applies to the sorting device 2340 and the stopping device 3340 in the above embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the variation period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 or 4, is 3 seconds, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the variable period that can be easily selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 is set to 5 seconds, and the variable period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4 is set to 3 seconds. May be. In this case, a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 while the variable display when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 is continuing, moves the detection port 312d before the continuous variable display ends. It can happen to pass (the number of reserved balls is 4). On the other hand, since there is a pitch interval of 3 seconds or more between the following balls and the variation display when the number of held balls is 4 is 3 seconds, a ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected after that. Before passing through the mouth 312d, the ongoing variation can be terminated to make room in the storage area.

  In the first embodiment, a sphere that rolls on the delay floor device 400 and enters the delay floor device 400 after the ball that falls from the chamfered portion 411a is moved into the fan-shaped member 410 by the fall of the ball from the chamfered portion 411a. Although the case where it is pushed back temporarily by operating has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fan-shaped member 410 may be driven regardless of the falling of the sphere, and in one state during the operation, a sphere that subsequently enters the delay device 400 may be temporarily stopped. In this case, the possibility of temporarily stopping on the delay device 400 can be given to all the balls entering the delay device 400.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the delay device 300 is connected to the first winning opening 64 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the delay device 300 may be connected to the second winning opening 640.

  In the first embodiment, the period from when the ball P1 passes through the detection port 312d to when the ball P2 passes through the detection port 312d is longer than the ball P2 passes through the detection port 312d. By setting it longer than the period until it passes 312d, there is a possibility that the ball P2 will pass through the detection port 312d after the ball P1 passes through the detection port 312d and before the display of the variation of the first symbol ends. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection port 312d to when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d, and a period from when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d to when the sphere P3 passes through the detection port 312d. May be set to substantially the same length. In this case, since the hold display of the first symbol is generated after a substantially equivalent period, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Further, for example, the period from when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d to the time when the sphere P3 passes through the detection port 312d than the period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection port 312d to when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d. The period may be set to be longer. In this case, since the ball P2 passes through the detection port 312d at an early stage, it is possible to easily increase the number of held balls when the currently continuing variation is finished, and shorten the duration of the subsequent variation display. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that overflow will occur at the first winning opening 64 due to the subsequent entry.

  In the first embodiment, the variable period that is easy to select when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is four is set to 3 seconds, and the variable period that is easy to select when the number of reserved balls is one is mentioned. Although the case of not doing was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is 1, the change period that is easy to be selected is 10 seconds. When the change period that is easy to be selected is 2 cases, the change period is 6 seconds. The variable period that is likely to be set may be set to 3 seconds.

  In this case, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is three, when a ball is fired so as to enter the first winning opening 64 (the variable display is executed when the number of held balls is three). (When the ball is made to enter the first winning opening 64 after that), before the ball P1 passes through the detection port 312d, the change display in the case where the number of held balls is three ends, and the number of held balls is two. In this case, the variable display is started.

  The ball P3 does not pass through the detection port 312d while the variable display in the case where the number of held balls is two is executed (6 seconds, that is, less than 9 seconds after entering the ball). Accordingly, since the ball P3 can pass through the detection port 312d after the current fluctuation is completed, the balls P1 to P3 are detected in the three storage areas secured by the completion of the current fluctuation. Data acquired by passing 312d can be stored.

  Thus, under the condition that the variation period that is easy to select when the number of retained balls is 3 or 4 is 3 seconds, the variation period when the number of retained balls is 2 is 7.5 seconds. Less than (the ball P3 passes through the detection port 312d even if the variable display (three seconds) is started when the number of balls to be held is three at the same time as the ball P1 enters the first winning port 64 (10.5) (After a second), it is possible to prevent an overflow from occurring at the first winning port 64 even if three balls have successively entered the first winning port 64. it can.

  In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning port 64 is two, when a ball is fired so as to enter the first winning port 64 (after the variable display when the number of held balls is two is executed). Variation when the number of reserved balls is two after the ball P1 passes through the detection port 312d and before the ball P2 passes through the detection port 312d) The display is completed, and the variable display is started again when the number of held balls is two (after the number of held balls is increased by entering the ball P1). Thereafter, since the spheres P2 and P3 can pass through the detection port 312d, the data acquired when the spheres P2 and P3 pass through the detection port 312d are stored in the remaining two storage areas. Can do.

  In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning port 64 is one, when the balls are fired so as to enter the first winning port 64, the balls P1 to P3 pass through the first winning port 64. Since the area for storing the data acquired by the above is sufficiently vacant, the data acquired by passing the balls P1 to P3 through the detection port 312d can be stored without any problem.

  In addition, each said embodiment suppresses that overflow arises in the 1st winning opening 64 when a ball | bowl enters the 1st winning opening 64 in the state where the number of reservation balls of the 1st winning opening 64 is 3 or less. This does not cause an overflow suppression effect until the first winning opening 64 is made to enter the first winning opening 64 with the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 being four (maximum).

  In the third embodiment, the case where the posture of the stopping device 3340 is maintained by a magnetic force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the locking member projects from the lower surface of the first wall portion 341, the projecting tip is bent toward the center hole 345, and the tip of the main body bar 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 is bent downward. The posture of the stopping device 3340 may be maintained by hooking the bent portions with each other. In this case, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state regardless of the load applied to the stop device 3340.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the second groove 4312 extends in the vertical direction has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second groove 4312 may be inclined along the front-rear direction immediately before the sprocket 4340 (immediately before the upstream side). In this case, even if the number of spheres staying above the sprocket 4340 increases, the load applied to the sprocket from the sphere can be reduced, and problems such as the rotation failure of the sprocket 4340 can be suppressed. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is won at about 1/1 regardless of the gaming state has been described, but the lottery is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery may be about 1/10 during the normal period, and the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery may be about 1/1 during the probability change.

  In the fifth embodiment, when a plurality of balls P51 to P55 enter the first winning port 64, the follow-up balls P52 to P53 pass through the second detection port 5314c to the third symbol display device 81. Although the case where the hold display of the first special symbol is performed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when there is a ball (a ball waiting to pass) after entering the first winning port 64 and before passing through the second detection port 5314c. Is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in advance, even if the waiting ball passes through the second detection port 5314c, when there is a vacancy in the hold display area (when the ongoing fluctuation has ended). The hold display may be performed in such a manner as to fill the empty area of the hold display of the first special symbol.

  In this case, although there is a ball waiting to pass, there is a vacancy in the hold display of the first special symbol regardless of the ball, and the player who has visually recognized it has launched a new ball toward the first winning port 64 After that, when the ball waiting to pass passes through the second detection port 5314c, the vacant area of the hold display is filled. As a result, even if a newly launched ball enters the first winning port 64, the first special symbol It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged that the variable display is not executed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the sphere that has passed through the stopping device 5500 passes through the second detection port 5314c immediately after that has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sphere that has passed through the stopping device 5500 may pass through a member such as a croon that can make the flow of the sphere non-uniform before passing through the second detection port 5314c. In this case, the period from when the ball passes through the stopping device 5500 to when it passes through the second detection port 5314c can be varied, and the randomness of the timing when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c is ensured. can do. In addition, a member such as a croon may be disposed on the upstream side of the stopping device 5500.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the stop device 3340 is released from the change state is described by the action of the ball that has entered the head, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the stop device 3340 may be released from the change state using a follower ball. Accordingly, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state until the follower ball enters the first winning port 64.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the continuous passage groove 5314 is extended rightward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the continuous passage groove 5314 may be extended to the back side. In this case, the space on the back side of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is disposed on the upstream side of the stopping device 5500 and the frequency of flow of the sphere toward the stopping device 5500 becomes excessive, the sphere is discharged from the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1. Although the case where it is possible to prevent the clogging of the balls (for example, the stagnation of the balls up to the first winning opening 64) can be prevented, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, sprockets capable of disposing spheres at respective angular positions may be disposed in a manner that partially protrudes into the flow path on the upstream side of the stopping device 5500, and may be rotationally driven at a constant speed. In this case, until the sprocket is full, the spheres flowing down toward the stopping device 5500 can be accommodated at the respective angular positions, so that clogging of the spheres can be prevented. The rotation axis of the sprocket is not limited at all. For example, you may rotate centering on the axis | shaft extended along the front-back direction, and you may rotate centering on the axis | shaft extended along an up-down direction.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the pair of movable plate portions 6510 are operated by the pair of independently driven drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 and the flow down mode of the sphere flowing down the stop portion 6314b changes in each period has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of movable plate portions 6510 may be operated in such a manner that the flow mode of the sphere flowing down the stop 6314b is always constant. In this case, it is possible to easily grasp the flow-down mode of the sphere.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case has been described in which the chain opening period T6a is set for 30 seconds while the upper closing period T6b is set for 1/5 of 6 seconds, but is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the chain opening period T6a may be set for 6 seconds, while the upper closing period T6b may be set for 5 times 30 seconds. In this case, since the period during which the spheres are retained on the upper surface of the upper movable plate 6511 can be lengthened, it is easy to increase the number of the retained spheres, and the spheres can be easily passed through the third detection port 5314e. In the gaming state in which a ball is launched toward the winning port 64, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which the electric accessory 640a is frequently opened.

  In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the case where the stopping portion 6314b2 has a size capable of accommodating two spheres has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be a size that can accommodate three or four. Further, the way of accommodating the spheres is not limited to the vertical packing. For example, the stop portion may be a horizontally long region and the spheres may be arranged side by side, or the sphere arrangement space may be narrowed down as it goes down by being similar in shape to the funnel.

  In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the case where the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is arranged to limit the number of spheres retained on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 to one is described. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 may be omitted. In this case, the upper limit of the number of balls stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 can be removed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the modification of the sixth embodiment, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b are arranged in one of the channels branched downstream of the first winning port 64. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, and 6500b may be arranged on the upstream side of the branch point (the connection point between the second groove 5312 and the continuous passage grooves 5314 and 6314) downstream of the first winning port 64. In this case, the ball that has entered the first winning port 64 is stopped at the stopping devices 5500, 6500, and 6500b, and the player can visually recognize the stopped ball through the glass unit 16, so the first winning port 64 Even if it is a case where it is not possible to judge at a glance whether or not the game ball jumps on the upstream side of the game and the ball has won the first winning opening 64, there is a ball stopped in the stopping devices 5500, 6500 and 6500b. By confirming this, it is possible to grasp that a ball has entered the first winning opening 64. In this case, it is not necessary to form a branch channel on the downstream side of the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b. That is, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, and 6500b may be disposed in the middle of a flow path formed from the first winning port 64 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the stopping device 3340 returns to the initial state by the action of the sphere flowing down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, if the ball does not contact the stop device 3340 for a certain period of time after entering the change state, the return to the initial state may be started. In this case, if the sphere continues to contact the stop device 3340 at regular time intervals, the sphere can continuously enter the continuous passage groove 7314. Further, the return may be started in a certain time after the stop device 3340 is changed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the length from the first winning port 64 to the second detecting port 5314c is longer than the length from the first winning port 64 to the detecting port 312d has been described. It is not limited to. For example, the length from the first winning port 64 to the detection port 312d and the length from the first winning port 64 to the second detection port 5314c are set to be the same, while the ball flows down to the detection port 312d. The flow path may be designed so that the flow resistance when the ball flows down to the second detection port 5314c is larger than the flow resistance. In this case, it is possible to define the order of passage of the spheres while suppressing the arrangement space of the flow paths.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction of the load applied to the sphere from the contact portion 3363 is the direction along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower surface of the contact portion 3363 may be configured to be inclined upward toward the back side. In this case, the load applied to the sphere from the contact portion 3363 can include a directional component along a plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed and a directional component toward the back side.

  In this case, depending on the magnitude of the load applied to the sphere from the contact portion 3363, the sphere tends to flow down continuously in the direction along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed, or the sphere tends to flow down toward the back side. Can be switched.

  For example, when the abutting portion 3363 and the ball come into contact with each other when the stop device 3340 is in a change state and the movement resistance of the abutting portion 3363 is increased by the attracting force of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362, the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 are attracted. A great amount of energy is consumed for tearing off, and the sphere rapidly decelerates. Therefore, the speed in the extending direction of the inclined flow path 8313 becomes extremely small, and the sphere follows the inclination of the contact portion 3363 to be in contact. Then, it flows to the back side and flows down from the communication opening 8313a through the second groove 8315b.

  On the other hand, for example, when the stopping device 3340 rotates from the change state, the attractive force of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 becomes weak, and the contact portion 3363 and the sphere come into contact when the movement resistance of the contact portion 3363 is weakened. In this case, since the deceleration action applied to the sphere by the load from the contact portion 3363 is reduced, the sphere flows down along the extending direction of the inclined flow path 8313 while pushing the contact portion 3363 away. Accordingly, the sphere reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b and starts to flow down the first groove 8315a.

  Accordingly, when the balls P81 and P82 pass through the V winning opening 800a continuously, the leading ball P81 flows down the second groove 8315b, while the follower ball P82 is provided with the first groove 8315a (V winning switch 8315d is provided. Flow down). Thereby, regardless of the operation mode of the stopping device 8500, when one ball passes through the V winning opening 800a, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the V winning switch 8315d.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the period during which the V winning device 800 is opened is 1.8 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the case where the period during which the V winning device 800 is opened is 0.5 seconds, 1.0 seconds, and 1.8 seconds may occur. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not a plurality of balls are likely to pass through the V winning opening 800a depending on the length of the open period of the V winning apparatus 800, and attention can be paid to the manner in which the balls pass through the V winning opening 800a. .

  In this case, the length of the open period of the V winning device 800 may be controlled depending on whether or not the ball can pass through the V winning switch 8315d by passing a plurality of balls through the V winning opening 800a. . For example, when a plurality of balls can pass through the V winning switch 8315d by passing through the V winning opening 800a, the open period of the V winning device 800 is 0.5 seconds with a probability of 80%. In this way, if a plurality of balls pass through the V winning opening 800a, a situation in which the balls pass through the V winning opening 800a while creating a situation where the balls pass through the V winning switch 8315d. Can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to create a game where the ball seems to pass the V winning switch 8315d but does not actually pass.

  In the eighth embodiment, when a plurality of balls have not entered the V winning device 800, a case where it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not these balls pass the V winning switch 8315d will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of LEDs are interspersed in the extending direction of the side groove 8315, and the LEDs are caused to emit light in order, thereby controlling the arrangement of the spheres that flow down when the sphere enters the V winning opening 800a. And it is good also as an aspect which can grasp | ascertain arrangement | positioning of the ball | bowl flowing down when a ball | bowl enters the V winning opening 800a by visually recognizing LED which light-emits. In this case, for example, even when a plurality of balls do not enter the V winning opening 800a, how the LEDs flow down if the plurality of balls enter the V winning opening 800a by the light emission of the LED. Since it is possible to notify whether or not the ball has passed through the V winning switch 8315d, it is possible to improve the player's interest (willingness to enter a plurality of balls into the V winning opening 800a). Can be made.

  In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which all the spheres flowing down the inclined flow path 8313 come into contact with the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 and the stop device 3340 can be returned from the change state to the initial state. It is not limited to this. For example, a contact portion 3363 may be disposed on the downstream side of the V winning switch 8315d, and the stop device 3340 may be returned from the change state to the initial state only when a ball passes through the V winning switch 8315d. In this case, after all the balls that have flowed down the main body member 8310 deviate from the V winning switch 8315d and pass only the discharge switch 8315e, the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. Therefore, even if only one sphere enters the main body member 8310, the sphere can flow into the branch delay groove 8314. Thereby, for example, when the stopping device 8500 operates so that the ball that has flowed down the branch delay groove 8314 can pass through the V winning switch 8315d, the opening / closing pattern of the V winning device 800 is set to increase the opening time of the V winning device 800. Even if control is performed to make it shorter (a rare length is that two balls enter), while the stop device 3340 maintains the change state, even if only one ball passes through the V winning opening 800a, Since the ball can flow to the branch delay groove 8314, a situation can be created in which the ball passes the V winning switch 8315d. That is, after the opening operation of the V winning device 800 that has finished without passing the ball through the V winning switch 8315d, when the V winning device 800 is opened again, the ball that entered the V winning opening 800a causes the V winning switch 8315d to move. The possibility of passing can be increased.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where only the first variable winning device 8065 opens and closes in the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the jackpot game, in addition to the first variable winning device 8065, the V winning device 800 may be opened and closed. In this case, the first variable winning device 8065 and the V winning device 800 are not opened simultaneously, and the number of jackpot rounds in the jackpot game is determined by the opening operation (constant opening / closing) of the first variable winning device 8065 and the V winning device 800. Set to match the total number of actions). In this case, the driving device 8520 performs different operations depending on the type of jackpot, and the game state is set to a high probability state after the jackpot game is finished, when the ball passes the V winning switch 8315d during the jackpot game. It may be set. This high probability state may continue until the start of the next jackpot game, or may continue until a predetermined number of changes in the first symbol (for example, 100 changes) are completed. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass the V winning switch 8315d during the jackpot game, the gaming state may be set to the short-time state after the jackpot game ends.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Turn the second ball or later to another route to delay and suppress overflow>
A lottery opportunity even if a game ball enters the first state in which a game ball enters and a state in which the game ball enters in the first state is switched. In a gaming machine that includes a detection entrance that can be configured to be in a second state to which no is given, and that returns to the first state when a predetermined return period elapses after being switched to the second state When a plurality of game balls are entered, a comparison is made with a period from when the first game ball, which is one of the plurality of game balls, enters to the detection entrance. And a delay means for delaying a period from when the second game ball, which is another game ball, enters the ball to be sent to the detection entrance, and a period delayed by the delay means is equal to or longer than the return period A gaming machine A1 characterized in that

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, information is acquired based on the entrance of the game ball and the game ball entered into the entrance, and the display means is based on the information. There is a game machine that dynamically displays the image (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information acquired based on the game ball entering the entrance, and it is impossible to store any more. Although it is configured, if a plurality of game balls continuously enter the entrance at short intervals, the upper limit of the memorable number is reached (second state), and so-called overflow may occur. There was a problem. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to reduce the number of balls to be continuously launched by self-judgment, or to play the game while always checking the number of stored information, which places a burden on the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the period from the time when the first game ball enters the detection entrance to the time when the second game ball enters the detection entrance is determined from the return period by the delay means. Since the second game ball is prevented from entering the detection entrance in the second state, the detection entrance is in the second state when the first game ball enters the detection entrance. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to form a vacant space in the number that can be stored before the second game ball enters the detection entrance, and the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

  The period delayed by the delay means is at least longer than the period of one dynamic display mode performed by the dynamic display means such as a liquid crystal device, and is the longest in the case where the number of information storage means is the upper limit. It is desirable that the period is longer than the period of the dynamic display mode.

  The configuration of the delay means is not particularly limited, and various modes can be considered. For example, a mode in which the path through which the game ball flows down may be distributed by the movable member, or a mode in which the path through which the game ball flows down may be allocated depending on the relationship between the shape of the flow path and the collision of the ball.

  In the gaming machine A1, the delay means distributes the game balls to a plurality of paths and distributes the distribution balls from the first position to the second position by passing the game balls, and the distribution means includes the distribution means. An urging means for generating an urging force for changing the attitude from the second attitude toward the first attitude; and the first game ball that has passed through the allocating means when the allocating means is in the first attitude to guide the detection. A first guide flow path for sending a ball to the ball opening, and the detection game entrance for guiding the second game ball that has passed through the distributing means immediately before the distributing means returns from the second posture to the first posture. A second guide flow path for sending a ball to the second guide flow path, and a period during which the second game ball passes through the second guide flow path is compared with a period during which the first game ball passes through the first guide flow path. The delay period Gaming machine A2, characterized in that it is configured as a difference between these periods.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A1, the delay means includes a distribution means, a first guide flow path to which the game balls are distributed by the distribution means, a second guide flow path, and a distribution means. An urging means for returning the posture, and compared with a period until the first game ball that has previously passed through the sorting means and guided through the first guide channel reaches the detection entrance, It is possible to lengthen the period until the second game ball that passes through the sorting means and is guided through the second guiding flow path reaches the detection entrance immediately before the sorting means returns to the first posture by the biasing means. Since the delay period is configured as the difference between these periods, the period during which the game ball flows down is more reliable than when the flow path of the game ball is determined at random, such as when the game ball collides with the nail. Can be made longer and the game ball is detected It can be shifted reliably the timing of reaching the sphere outlet.

  In addition, since the posture of the distribution means is returned by the biasing means, the game balls are distributed until the game balls arrive at the distribution means at intervals (when there is no need to delay the game balls coming later). It is possible to prevent the second guide channel from being distributed by the means.

  In the gaming machine A2, the distribution means includes a first wall portion that faces the game ball in a flow-down direction when the first posture is set, and a game ball that is in contact with the first wall portion. A second wall portion disposed at a sandwiched position, and the second wall portion receives a load along a flow-down direction from the game ball, thereby causing the first posture from the second posture of the distribution means. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a posture change in a direction toward the posture is suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A2, the second wall portion disposed at a position sandwiching the gaming ball colliding with the distributing means with the first wall portion is provided along the flow direction from the gaming ball. Since the distribution means is restrained from changing its posture in the direction from the second posture to the first posture by receiving the load, a game ball that has passed through the distribution means first passes through the distribution means later. The action of the sphere can prevent the flow from being hindered and the flow from being delayed.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the distribution unit includes a dividing unit that divides a game ball that flows down continuously and guides only one ball to the first guide channel, and changes its posture according to the weight of the game ball. A gaming machine A4 configured as described above, wherein the dividing means functions by changing the posture of the distributing means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the dividing means of the distributing means divides the balls that flow down continuously, and the plurality of balls are guided to the first guide channel. This can be prevented without adding a drive source.

  In addition, as the dividing means, a means for pushing the game balls toward the second guide flow path by projecting toward the inside of the flow path, or a series of game balls connected by projecting toward the inside of the flow path is used. Examples of the means that are inserted in between and that separate the game balls are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A4, the distribution means includes a first wall portion that faces the game ball in a flow-down direction when the first posture is set, and a game ball that is in contact with the first wall portion. A second wall portion disposed at a sandwiched position, and the second wall portion is moved to the second game ball in the moving direction when the distribution means changes its posture from the first posture to the second posture. The gaming machine A5 is configured in such a manner that the game ball is introduced into the second guide channel by collision.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A4, when the sorting means collides with the second game ball in the moving direction during the posture change, a game is played between the sorting means and the first guide channel. It is possible to prevent the sorting means from malfunctioning due to the sphere being caught.

  Here, for example, when the sorting means is operated electrically, the sorting means operates regardless of the position of the game ball, so that the game ball is located away from the entrance of the second guide flow path and the sorting means When the sorting unit operates in a direction in which the distance between the sorting unit and the side wall of the first guide flow path is narrowed in a state where the sorting unit is arranged at a position between the side wall of the first guide channel and the first guide channel side wall, There is a possibility that a game ball is sandwiched between the guide channel and the sorting means malfunctions.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A5, since the operation of the distribution device is not electric but occurs with the weight of the game ball, the distribution unit does not operate in a state where the distribution unit causes malfunction due to the arrangement of the game balls. Thus, the positional relationship and the shape relationship can be designed in advance. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the distribution means.

  In the gaming machine A5, a position where a plurality of game balls reach the sorting means, and one game ball contacts the first wall portion, so that the other game ball contacts in the moving direction of the second wall portion. In the connected ball introduction state in which the distribution means is changed in posture until the one guide ball and the side surface forming the inlet of the second guide channel from the first guide channel, the first guide flow A gaming machine A6, which is a distance between end faces with a side surface on the downstream side of the road, and a distance along the extending direction of the first guide flow path is equal to or less than a radius of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A5, in the connected ball introduction state, when the other gaming ball is connected to the one gaming ball and reaches the sorting means, the center of the other gaming ball is the second. Since it is arranged in a region inside the second guide channel when the guide channel is extended, the game ball can be pushed along the side surface of the second guide channel, and the game ball is inserted into the second guide channel. Can be introduced.

  In the gaming machines A4 to A6, the distribution means performs a return operation from the second posture to the first posture over a period longer than the return period.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A4 to A6, it is possible to reliably prevent the second gaming ball from entering the detection entrance while the entrance detection port is in the second state. be able to.

  In the case where the dynamic display mode of the display device is a mode in which a short-term one is more easily selected as the number of detected entrances is larger, the length of the predetermined dynamic display mode is at least the detection input. It is desirable that the length of the shortest dynamic display mode in the case where the number of memories stored in the bulb opening is the upper limit value or more.

<Overflow suppression by making the stage operable with the weight of the ball>
A lottery opportunity even if a game ball enters the first state in which a game ball enters and a state in which the game ball enters in the first state is switched. In a gaming machine that includes a detection entrance that can be configured to be in a second state to which no is given, and that returns to the first state when a predetermined return period elapses after being switched to the second state The rolling means is configured to have an optimum drop portion that is a descent start position at which a game ball can easily enter the detection entrance and to allow the game ball to roll on the upper surface in a manner that the game ball passes through the optimum drop portion. And the rolling means operates in such a manner that the game ball starts to descend from the optimum drop part with an interval equal to or longer than the return period.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the game ball has an optimum drop portion arranged as a descending start portion that is easy to enter the detection entrance, and the game ball arranged on the upper surface has the optimum fall portion. There is a gaming machine provided with rolling means (so-called “stage”) configured to be able to roll in a passing manner (see, for example, JP 2011-1556058 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the second game ball rides on the rolling means before the first game ball that first rides on the rolling means descends from the rolling means. In some cases, the two game balls may descend from the optimal drop part in a short period of time, and there is a problem that overflow may occur at the detection entrance.

  This is different from the state where the game balls flow down while colliding with the nail, and the game balls reciprocate in the left-right direction in a manner that passes the optimum drop part (the game balls reciprocate along a specific route). Is a particular problem on rolling means that tend to collide frequently.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the rolling means operates in such a manner that the game balls start descending one by one with a gap from the optimum drop portion, so that the game can be played at the detection entrance in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the balls from entering the ball together. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls ride on the rolling means, it is possible to suppress overflow from occurring at the detection entrance.

  The gaming machine B1 includes an introduction flow path for introducing a game ball to the rolling means, and the rolling means is configured to introduce a game ball from the introduction flow path and guide the game ball to the optimum drop portion. 1 floor member is provided, the 1st floor member is formed so that operation is possible by the weight of the game ball which rolls, and the speed toward the 1st floor member of the game ball which arrives later by the operation is reduced. A gaming machine B2 that operates in a manner.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, when the game ball rides on the first floor member of the rolling means, the first floor member operates by the weight of the game ball, Since the speed of the sphere toward the first floor member can be reduced, the interval between the game ball riding on the first floor member and the game ball facing the first floor member can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an overflow from occurring at the detection entrance.

  In addition, as a case where the speed toward the first floor member of the game ball is reduced, for example, when the speed of the game ball toward the first floor member is decreased (braking), or when the game ball is stopped, The case where the game ball is moved in the direction opposite to the direction toward the first floor member (reverse running) is exemplified.

  In addition, as a method of reducing the speed of the game ball toward the first floor member, for example, a method in which the first floor member is inclined to move away from the first floor member, or an upper surface of the first floor member is used. Examples include a method of projecting a speed-reducing protrusion and a method of projecting a magnet at a position where a magnetic force can act on the game ball on the first floor member.

  In the gaming machine B2, the optimal drop portion is disposed on the first floor member, and the first floor member is configured to operate when the game ball is dropped from the optimal drop portion. The moving means is placed in the vicinity of the first floor member before and after the game ball drops from the optimum drop portion, and the optimum drop of other game balls heading for the optimum drop portion within a predetermined period of time. A gaming machine B3, comprising a prevention means for preventing the player from reaching the section.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the first floor member is configured to operate when the gaming ball falls from the optimum dropping portion, and the rolling means is a gaming ball from the optimum dropping portion. Before and after the ball is dropped, it is placed on the first floor member and prevents other game balls heading for the optimum drop part within a predetermined period by the prevention means. Therefore, a plurality of game balls are connected to the optimum drop part. Even in this case, after the earliest game ball has fallen from the optimum drop portion, it is possible to prevent other game balls from continuously falling from the optimum drop portion. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an overflow from occurring at the detection entrance.

  In the gaming machine B3, the prevention means can be configured to be in a prevention state in which a game ball can be prevented and in a passage state in which a game ball cannot be prevented, and the optimum immediately after the game ball has dropped from the optimum drop portion As a state of the falling part, a suitable falling state in which the game ball has fallen in a manner that makes it easy to enter the gaming ball into the detection entrance, and a game ball entering the detection entrance compared to the suitable falling state A normal fall state in which the game ball has fallen in a difficult manner, and the prevention means is set to the prevention state when the preferred fall state is set, and the prevention means is set to the normal fall state. A gaming machine B4, characterized in that is in a passing state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, when the optimum falling portion is in the preferred falling state, the prevention means is in the preventing state and the optimum falling portion is in the normal falling state. Since the prevention means is in a passing state, the prevention of the game ball is prevented until the game ball falling from the optimal drop portion does not enter the detection entrance. It can suppress that the timing to enter a ball is meaninglessly delayed.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the gaming machine B5 is provided with a ball sending means for sending the game ball prevented by the preventing means in a direction away from the optimum dropping portion.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the game ball prevented by the prevention means by the pitching means is sent in a direction away from the optimum falling part, thereby making the movement of the gaming ball intense. Since it is possible to earn a period until the game ball reaches the optimum falling portion again, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow at the detection entrance while improving the interest of the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, an intermediate floor member that introduces a game ball to the first floor member is provided, the intermediate floor member is operable, and descends in a direction away from the first floor member by the operation A gaming machine B6 in which the intermediate floor member changes its state to an inclined state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the intermediate floor member is inclined downward in the direction away from the first floor member, so that the game ball reaching the intermediate floor member Gravitational acceleration can be generated in a direction away from the first floor member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the separation width between the game ball arranged on the first floor member and the game ball reaching the intermediate floor member from being reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6, the intermediate floor member is disposed in a pair on both sides of the first floor member, and the posture change of the intermediate floor member alternately occurs in the pair of intermediate floor members.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, a pair of intermediate floor members are arranged on both sides of the first floor member, and the posture change of the intermediate floor member occurs alternately between the pair of intermediate floor members. When game balls are directed to both the pair of intermediate floor members, the timing at which those game balls are decelerated can be shifted, and the timing at which these game balls reach the first floor member can be shifted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from being congested near the optimum falling part.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B7, in the rolling means, the reciprocating motion in the left-right direction has finished converging, and the game ball that has reached the optimum drop portion and passes through the introduction flow path to the first floor member A gaming machine B8, which is configured in a manner to prevent a collision with a game ball flowing down.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, in the rolling means, the game ball that has reached the optimal drop portion after the reciprocating motion in the left-right direction has converged and passes through the introduction channel Since it is configured in such a manner as to prevent a collision with the game ball flowing down toward the first floor member, the game ball immediately before falling from the optimum drop part is collided with another game ball and is detected. It is possible to prevent the game balls from falling in a direction away from each other and from colliding with each other from passing through the detection entrance.

<Overflow suppression by slowing down the second ball and shifting the winning timing>
A lottery opportunity even if a game ball enters the first state in which a game ball enters and a state in which the game ball enters in the first state is switched. In a gaming machine that includes a detection entrance that can be configured to be in a second state to which no is given, and that returns to the first state when a predetermined return period elapses after being switched to the second state When a plurality of game balls enter, the flow speed of the second game ball subsequently entered is compared with the flow speed of the first game ball that has entered the earliest of the plurality of game balls. The game ball sent from the speed reduction means is configured to enter the detection entrance, and the second game ball enters the speed reduction means and then the detection input. The period of time required for entering the ball opening is the first game ball. It said than this period until the ball entrance from the ball entrance to the detected incoming spherical opening to the deceleration means, the gaming machine C1, characterized in that is composed of long become manner than the length of the return period.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, information is acquired based on the entrance of the game ball and the game ball entered into the entrance, and the display means is based on the information. There is a game machine that dynamically displays the image (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information acquired based on the game ball entering the entrance, and it is impossible to store any more. Although it is configured, there is a problem that when a plurality of game balls enter the entrance in succession at short intervals, the upper limit of the number that can be stored is reached, and so-called overflow may occur. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to reduce the number of balls to be continuously launched by self-judgment, or to play the game while always checking the number of stored information, which places a burden on the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when a plurality of game balls enter the speed reduction means, the speed reduction means compares with the flow-down speed of the first game ball that has entered the earliest of the plurality of game balls. Thereafter, the second game ball that has entered the ball is decelerated, and the second game ball enters the detection entrance until the return period elapses after the first game ball enters the detection entrance. Since entering the ball is prevented, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

  The period from when the second game ball enters the deceleration means to when the second game ball enters the detection entrance is from the first game ball entered the deceleration means to the detection entrance. Compared with the period until the time until the first, the period of at least one dynamic display mode (return period) performed by the dynamic display means is made longer, and in particular, the detection entrance is in the second state. It is desirable that the period is longer than the period of the longest dynamic display mode.

  In addition, the deceleration of the game ball means that the velocity component along the route toward the detection entrance is reduced. For example, the game ball flows in a direction away from the detection entrance (the negative velocity is reduced). The decelerating means has a preventive means for temporarily preventing the ball from being thrown in, or when reciprocating in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the detection entrance (zigzag movement). Until the prevention is canceled, it includes a case where the game ball reciprocates before the prevention means, a case where the game ball temporarily stops, and the like.

  As a means for decelerating the game sphere, a method of projecting a contact member that faces and contacts the game ball in the flow-down direction, a method of applying a magnetic force to the game ball flowing down, For example, a method of arranging a sprocket in a passage through which the game ball passes and rotating the sprocket on a game ball is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine C1, the speed reducing means decelerates the gaming ball by intermittently applying a load in a direction opposite to the flow-down direction to the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the speed reduction means intermittently applies a load in the opposite direction of the flow-down direction to the gaming ball, thereby reducing the number of revolutions of the gaming ball. Since the game ball is decelerated, the game ball can be effectively decelerated.

  In addition, when decelerating by friction with the wall surface, it is necessary to increase the contact area in order to improve deceleration efficiency, but if the target is a sphere like a game ball, it is difficult to increase the contact area sufficiently It is. In contrast, in the aspect in which the load is intermittently applied in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction, the efficiency of deceleration does not depend on the shape of the target, so that the game ball can be effectively decelerated.

  In the gaming machine C2, the decelerating means is arranged to be able to move relative to the decelerating flow path for guiding the incoming game ball, and to be able to apply a load to the game ball. And a moving means having an action part, the moving means being capable of configuring a first state and a second state that is a state after the relative movement from the first state to the deceleration flow path. The action portion is configured in such a manner that a load is applied to the game ball flowing down the deceleration channel in the second state, and the moving means is configured to allow the first game ball to pass through the deceleration channel. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the state changes from the first state to the second state, and in the second state, the operating unit applies a load to the second game ball.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the moving means having the action part can be configured in the first state and the second state, and the moving means passes through the deceleration flow path. The state is changed to the second state by the action of the second game ball in the second state, so that the second game ball can be decelerated without preparing a separate drive device because the load is applied from the action part. The distance between the first game ball and the second game ball can be increased.

  Examples of the action part include a rib part that extends in a direction perpendicular to the extension direction of the deceleration flow path and projects into the deceleration flow path, and a magnet part that applies a magnetic force to the game ball. In the case where the action part is a rib part, there are an aspect in which the speed of the game ball is gradually reduced as an overhang width that allows the game ball to pass, and an aspect in which the game ball protrudes so as not to pass and the game ball is stopped. Illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C3, the moving means is configured in such a manner that the degree of deceleration of the second gaming ball increases as the number of balls entering the deceleration means increases within a predetermined period. Characteristic gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C3, the greater the number of balls entering the speed reducing means within a predetermined period, the more the action unit increases the degree of deceleration of the second gaming ball. When the number of balls flowing through the deceleration flow path becomes three within the period, the third game ball can be decelerated more than the second game ball, so the second game ball And the third game ball can be widened. As a result, even if the second game ball enters the detection entrance and the detection entrance is in the second state, the second game ball is in the interval until the third game ball enters. It is possible to earn a period during which the dynamic display of 1 is executed (return period), and to prevent an overflow from occurring when the third game ball passes through the detection means.

  In addition, as a mode in which the action unit increases the degree of deceleration of the second game ball, for example, a mode in which a load acting on the second game ball increases or a length (period) in which the load acts on the second game ball is used. The aspect etc. which the work amount applied to a 2nd game ball increases by being expanded are illustrated.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the speed reducing means includes a miniaturizing means configured to be relatively movable with respect to a flow path through which the game balls flow down, and the miniaturizing means includes the first gaming balls. The gaming machine C5 is characterized by moving in a direction of narrowing the inner peripheral shape of the flow path before passing the second game ball by passing.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the downsizing means can reduce the inner peripheral shape of the flow path before the second gaming ball passes by passing the first gaming ball. Since it moves in the direction of narrowing, the resistance of the flow path when the second game ball passes can be increased. Thereby, a 2nd game ball can be decelerated.

  By matching the position where the inner peripheral shape of the flow path is narrowed with the position where the flow path changes direction (the position where the velocity component in the direction in which the game ball has flowed until then disappears), the game ball will flow down to that point. It is possible to apply a large resistance at the timing of stopping along the direction in which the game ball has been stopped, to suppress the game ball from passing through with momentum, and to increase the action of decelerating the game ball.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, there is provided a release means for releasing the deceleration effect generated in the second game ball by the speed reduction means by a state change, and the state change of the release means is a game that has passed through the speed reduction means. A gaming machine C6, which is performed by passing a ball through a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the gaming machine C6 is provided with a release means for releasing the deceleration effect, and the release by the release means allows the game ball that has passed through the deceleration means to pass through a predetermined position. Since this is done, other driving means for changing the state of the releasing means can be dispensed with.

  In the gaming machine C6, the game machine C7 is characterized in that the release by the release means is performed by the game ball after passing through the detection entrance.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C6, the release by the release means is performed by the game ball after passing through the detection entrance, so it is easy to manage the timing of the release by the release means It can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the deceleration means is configured in such a manner that the state changes between an initial state and a change state different from the initial state. It changes to the change state by passing, and in the change state, it is configured to change to the initial state when the game ball does not pass through the deceleration means for a predetermined period, and the game ball passes through the reduction means. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the period is set to be longer in the period of passing through the deceleration means in the changed state than in the period of passing through the deceleration means in the initial state.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the passing period of the game ball that passes through the speed reduction means when the speed reduction means is in the initial state is shortened, and thereafter the speed reduction means is passed. As long as the interval between the game balls does not become longer than the predetermined period, the speed reduction means can always be maintained in a changing state, and the period during which the game balls pass through the speed reduction means can be kept long.

  In the gaming machine C8, when a game ball enters the deceleration means at an interval shorter than the predetermined interval while the deceleration means is in the change state, regardless of the number of game balls entered. The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the deceleration means sends a game ball at a constant interval longer than the predetermined interval.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C8, even when a plurality of gaming balls enter the deceleration means when the deceleration means is in a changing state, the number is constant regardless of the number of balls entered. Since game balls can be sent at intervals, it is possible to prevent an overflow from occurring at the detection entrance regardless of the number of entrances.

  In addition, as a deceleration means, the sprocket-shaped apparatus comprised so that a game ball can be accommodated in the recessed part of a surrounding surface is illustrated.

<Large concept of delaying the follower ball after continuous entry. Merge, branch, both included>
A gaming ball is formed of a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down, a detecting means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and the gaming area and the detecting means. A connecting flow path that allows flow down, and switching means configured to be able to switch a flow path in which the game ball flows down in the connection flow path, wherein the connection flow path includes at least one flow path, A gaming machine D0, wherein a period required for a game ball to flow down the connection flow path varies depending on which flow path of the flow path that the connection flow path constitutes.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a plurality of guiding paths guided to a start winning opening, and a storage device capable of storing game balls is disposed on one guiding path, and the gaming balls are stored in the storage device. When the game ball that has reached is guided to the other taxiway, the game ball is guided toward the start winning opening, and the game ball stored in the storage device is released from storage by any operation of the player, There is a gaming machine that is directed toward the mouth (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176547). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the discharge timing of the game balls stored in the storage device depends on the player's operation, for example, when a plurality of game balls are guided to one guide path When a game ball is guided to another taxiway, it is not noticed and the storage of the storage operation is canceled, and there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls may be discharged toward the start winning opening. There was a problem. In this case, since it is necessary for the player to follow the flow-down mode of the plurality of game balls, the flow of the game ball is felt rushing, and the player may be confused.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D0, it is possible to switch the flow path in which the game ball flows down in the connection flow path, and the game ball has a connection flow path depending on which flow path that the connection flow path constitutes. Since the period required to flow down changes, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game balls are continuously discharged from the connection flow path.

  In the gaming machine D0, the detection means detects the passage of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the connection flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player along with the detection of the passage of the game balls. And at least one of the connecting flow paths is different from the first flow path connected to one of the detection means, and the first flow path is different from the first flow path. A second flow path connected to one of the first flow path and the second flow path during a period required for the game ball to flow from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. In comparison, the gaming machine D1 is configured as a flow path that requires a long period for the game ball to flow down from the gaming area to the detection means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0, even when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connection channel from the game area, the detection means is provided by flowing down the first channel. A difference can be provided in the timing of entering the detection means between the game ball that has passed and the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path and passed through the detection means. That is, even when a plurality of game balls enter the connection channel, the timing at which the entered game balls pass through the detection means can be shifted.

  In addition, the aspect which lengthens a period is not limited at all. For example, the second flow path may be formed from an aspect in which the flow resistance is larger than that of the first flow path (difference due to speed), or the second flow path may be formed in the first flow path. Compared to the above, it may be formed longer along the flow direction of the game ball (difference due to distance).

  In the gaming machine D1, the switching means is switched to a change state in which the game ball flows down the second flow path due to the game ball flowing down the first flow path. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the maintained period is defined regardless of the game ball flowing down the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, unlike the case of using an alternating sorting member, the gaming ball that flows down the second flow path during the period during which the switching means is maintained in the changed state. By defining independently, the game ball can continuously enter the second flow path during this period. As a result, for example, when the ball entering the second channel sets a larger profit to be given to the player than the ball entering the first channel, the game ball continuously enters the second channel. This can increase the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine D2, the switching means is released from maintaining the changed state by a gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the maintenance of the change state of the switching means is released by the gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path, so that the gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path. By making the flow down mode constant, the period during which the switching means is maintained in the change state can be made constant. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier to play a game that aims to make the game ball enter the second flow path.

  On the other hand, the period during which the switching means is maintained in the change state can be changed by changing the flow-down mode of the game ball that has passed through the first flow path. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent the period during which the game ball is allowed to enter the second flow path from being always the same, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the detection means includes a first detection port connected to the first flow channel and a second detection port connected to the second flow channel. A gaming machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second detection port is set so that the profit obtained by the player is greater than the first detection port. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player when continuous entry occurs. For example, a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol can be acquired by a game ball passing through the first detection port, while a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol can be acquired by a game ball passing through the second detection port. Anyway.

  In this case, the jackpot allocation of the second special symbol can be set so that the profit given to the player is higher than the jackpot allocation of the first special symbol, and the player for the consecutive pitching Can improve the interest of

  Furthermore, the number of prize balls to be paid out when passing through the second detection port (for example, four) is set in comparison with the prize balls to be paid out when passing through the first detection port (for example, one). Thus, even if the special symbol is not a big hit, the profit given to the player by the continuous entry can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In other words, the present invention includes a game ball that has finally been determined to pass through the first detection port, and that enables entry into the second detection port. Thereby, for example, when it is possible to continuously enter the second detection port by a game ball other than the game ball passing through the first detection port (for example, the second detection port can acquire the second special symbol). Compared with the case where a normal symbol detection port is arranged at the left part of the game area), attention to the game ball passing through the first detection port can be improved.

  The second detection port connected to the second channel may be arranged as a detection port through which all game balls that have entered the second channel pass, or a game that has entered the second channel. It may be arranged as a detection port through which a part of the sphere passes. In this case, the number of game balls that have entered the second flow path may pass through the second detection port due to the frequency of game balls entering the connection flow path. Further, a movable device that can change the number of game balls that pass through the second detection port may be arranged in the connection channel even if the frequency of entering the game balls into the connection channel is the same.

  Also, even if a plurality of game balls flow down continuously toward the detection means, if the change state of the switching means is canceled by the game balls that have passed through the first detection port, The game ball can flow down toward the second detection port connected to the second flow path.

  Thereby, when the first detection port and the second detection port are start ports capable of acquiring the same special symbol variation lottery, it is easy to create a situation in which the game ball passes through the second detection port after the end of the variation. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D4, the connection flow path includes a passing port through which a game ball can pass upstream of the switching unit, and the game ball that has passed through the passing port is guided to the switching unit, and passes through the passing port. A gaming machine D5 that allows a gaming ball that has passed through and guided to the switching means to deviate from the first flow path to enter the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4, the game ball that has passed through the passage of the connection channel is guided to the switching means, so that by continuing to fire the game ball aiming at the passage The state change of the switching means and the game ball can be divided into the first flow path and the second flow path. Thereby, the adjustment of the launch intensity of the game ball can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the second detection port is a detection port that can acquire a type of lottery different from the lottery that can be acquired by a game ball passing through the first detection port.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4 or D5, since at least one gaming ball passes through the first detection port before the gaming ball passes through the second detection port, the first Using the notification related to the lottery of the detection port as a mark, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through the second detection port from being overlooked.

  The combination of the types of lotteries that can be acquired when the game ball passes through the first detection port and the second detection port is not limited. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be different, or the first special symbol and the normal symbol may be different.

  In the gaming machine D6, the second detection port is a detection port capable of acquiring a lottery more advantageous than a lottery that can be acquired by a game ball passing through the first detection port.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D6, even when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connection channel at the same time, the second after the gaming ball passes through the first detection port, Since the game ball can pass through the detection port, it is possible to forcibly create a waiting time until an advantageous lottery change display is started.

  In the gaming machine D6, the second detection port has an advantageous detection that starts a variation advantageous due to the passage of the game ball over a variation initiated due to the game ball passing through the first detection port. A gaming machine D8, wherein the gaming machine D8 is a detection port capable of starting a change to form a state in which a game ball can easily enter the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D6, the action of the game ball entering the connection channel can open and close the movable device at a position different from the connection channel, It is possible to form a gaming state in which the profit given to the player is increased. In this case, in a gaming state in which the profit given to the player is large, a notification is made to urge the player to launch a game ball toward the open movable device. It is possible to naturally elapse the time during which the variation started due to the passing of the game ball proceeds.

<Concept of placing a fixed drive stopping device in the second flow path>
A gaming ball is formed of a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down, a detecting means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and the gaming area and the detecting means. A connecting flow path that allows flow down, and switching means configured to be able to switch a flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connection flow path, wherein the game ball flows down inside the connection flow path Two movable members that change state between a first state to be regulated and a second state that allows the game ball to flow down, and a drive unit that drives the movable member, and the detection unit includes: Detecting the passage of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the connecting flow path, and providing a predetermined benefit to the player along with the detection of the passage of the game balls, comprising at least one, At least one movable member Gaming machine E1, characterized in that disposed in can accommodate spacing one game ball.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a plurality of guiding paths guided to a start winning opening, and a storage device capable of storing game balls is disposed on one guiding path, and the gaming balls are stored in the storage device. When the game ball that has reached is guided to the other taxiway, the game ball is guided toward the start winning opening, and the game ball stored in the storage device is released from storage by any operation of the player, There is a gaming machine that is directed toward the mouth (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176547). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the timing of discharging the game ball stored in the storage device depends on the player's operation, so for example, while the game ball is being guided to another guideway There is a problem that the storage device is released without being noticed, and a plurality of game balls may be discharged simultaneously toward the start winning opening.

  In this case, since it is necessary for the player to follow the flow-down mode of the plurality of game balls, the flow of the game ball is felt rushing, and the player may be confused. In addition, when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls at the start winning opening is 0, even if a plurality of game balls enter the start winning opening, a lottery by entering some game balls This will only give you an opportunity and may be detrimental to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one game ball can be accommodated between the two movable members that are driven by the driving means and allow or restrict the flow of the game ball flowing down the connection channel. Since the game balls can be stopped in the connection flow path while at least one of the movable members maintains the first state, the connected flow is controlled by the driving mode of the two movable members. An interval can be provided at the timing when the game ball is discharged from the road.

  In the gaming machine E1, the two movable members include a first movable member, and a second movable member disposed on the downstream side of the connection flow path as compared to the first movable member, The two movable members are driven so as to be able to form the first state when a game ball that has passed through the first movable member in the second state reaches at least the second movable member. E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the first movable member and the second movable member are arranged along the flow direction of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball that has passed through the first movable member is at least When it reaches the second movable member, it is driven to be able to be formed in the first state, so that it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through (passing without stopping). Therefore, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need for complicated control such as detecting the arrangement of game balls flowing down the connection flow path and changing the movable member to the first state immediately before the game ball reaches the movable member.

  In the gaming machine E2, a game ball entering the connection flow path is regulated by the first movable member after the flow is restricted by the first movable member or after the flow is restricted by the second movable member. An gaming machine E3, comprising an upper limit passage means that is formed so that a game ball can pass when entering the ball exceeding the upper limit number.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the number of gaming balls that need to enter the connection channel in order to pass the gaming balls through the upper limit passage means is the state of the two movable members. Therefore, the number of game balls that need to enter the second flow path in order to pass the game balls to the upper limit passage means can be changed in some cases.

  Also, when more than the upper limit number of game balls enter the connection flow path, the game balls pass through the upper limit passage means and are discharged to another flow path, so that too many game balls are connected to the connection flow path. When a ball enters the road, it is possible to prevent clogging of the ball.

  Note that when the game ball is stored starting from the second movable member (when the flow is restricted by the second movable member), the game ball is stored starting from the first movable member (flowing to the first movable member). The upper limit number is increased by the number that can be accommodated between the first movable member and the second movable member.

  When both the first movable member and the second movable member are in the second state, the upper limit number is not specified (becomes infinite) because the game balls are not stored.

  In the gaming machine E3, the detection means includes an upper limit passage opening through which the game ball flowing down through the upper limit passage section is allowed to pass, and the upper limit passage opening is caused by the passage of the game ball. Variation to form a state in which a game ball can easily enter a beneficial detection port that initiates a variation more advantageous than the variation initiated due to the passing of the detection means due to the passage of the gaming ball A gaming machine E4 that is configured as a detection port capable of starting the game.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, a state in which the game ball can pass to the advantageous detection port is formed by passing the game ball through the upper limit passage port. Motivation to continuously enter the game balls of can be performed.

  In addition, the type of variation started by a game ball entering the connection channel is switched according to a matter that can be changed according to the player's intention to enter a lot of game balls into the connection channel. Can do. Therefore, the detection port through which the game balls pass is switched according to the order in which the game balls enter the connection flow path, and the game balls enter the connection flow path as compared to the case where the type of variation to be started is switched. Thus, the ratio of the player's intention related to the determination of the variation type started can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E4, according to the state of the movable member, a dynamic upper limit number, which is a number that allows a game ball to pass through the upper limit passage port by allowing a predetermined number of game balls to enter the connection channel. A gaming machine E5 that is settable.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the dynamic upper limit number can be set according to the state of the movable member (including the operation speed), so the state of the movable member during the game is different. Thus, it is possible to change the number of game balls that enter the connection channel and pass through the upper limit passage. Thereby, the attention with respect to the game ball which entered the connection flow path can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the driving mode of the driving means is the first storage state in which the game balls can be stored in the two movable members, and the game balls are less likely to be stored than in the first storage state. A gaming machine E6 that is switchable between the second storage state and the second storage state.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the driving mode of the driving means is the first storage even when the number of gaming balls sent to the second flow path is the same. Depending on whether the state is the second storage state or the second storage state, it is possible to form a state where the game ball is easily stored by two movable members and a state where it is difficult to store.

  Thus, in the case where the game ball is played in a state where it is easy to store, and in the case where the game is played in a state where it is difficult to store, there is a benefit that the player can obtain even if the game ball is inserted into the connection channel. Since it changes, it is possible to allow the player to select in which state the game is to be played by displaying the change in profit obtained on the display device.

  The first storage state includes a state in which all the spheres that reach the two movable members are stored, and the second storage state does not store all the spheres that reach the two movable members. The state to pass is included.

<1 type 2 type V (or V accuracy). Multiple balls in V (Initial image of a flow path that can be covered)>
A gaming ball is formed of a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down, a detecting means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area, and the gaming area and the detecting means. And a switching channel configured to be able to switch the channel through which the game ball flows down in the connection channel, and the detection unit is at least partly flowing down the connection channel And detecting a passage of the game ball and providing a predetermined benefit to the player in accordance with the detection of the passage of the game ball, wherein the switching means is provided within a predetermined period. Of the plurality of game balls that have entered the connection flow path, the subsequent game ball that has entered after that is easier to pass through the detection means than the earliest game ball that has entered first. Switching the connecting flow path in such a manner. Game machine F1 to.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine having a guide path through which a game ball that has passed through a through gate is guided to a start winning opening, and the ratio of winning from the guiding path to the starting winning opening can be changed periodically. (See, for example, JP-A-2001-70526). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the rate of winning from the taxiway to the starting prize opening does not change depending on the game ball entry mode, and the game ball will enter the taxiway in a single shot. There will be no significant change in the benefits given to the player, regardless of whether they enter the taxiway together. Therefore, there has been a problem that the effect of improving the attention to the game ball entering the taxiway is insufficient.

  According to the gaming machine F1, when a plurality of game balls enter the connection flow path within a predetermined period, the next game ball entered after that is compared with the earliest game ball entered first. Since the switching means acts to make it easier to pass through the detection means, it is possible to improve the attention to the subsequent game balls, and to motivate to enter a plurality of game balls together in the connection flow path (motivation) And the player can be prevented from making single shots.

  In the gaming machine F1, the switching means functions by an action given by the flow of the gaming ball that has entered the connection channel.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, the switching means functions due to the action given by the flow of the gaming ball, and the subsequent gaming balls can more easily pass the detection means. It is not necessary to control the operation of the electric movable device in anticipation of the flow-down time of the first game ball or the subsequent game ball, and the operation control can be facilitated.

  In addition, the aspect in which a switching means functions by the effect | action of a game ball is not specifically limited, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, it may be an aspect in which the attitude of the switching means changes due to the collision of the game balls, or an aspect in which the switching means is driven due to the detection of the passage of the game balls.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the connection flow path is different from at least a part of the first flow path connected to the detection means, and is connected to one of the detection means. A second flow path, wherein the second flow path is compared to a period required for a game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. To the detection means is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time to flow down, and the switching means is configured so that the earliest game ball flows down the first flow path, so that the succeeding game ball Changes to a state of passing through the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, even when a plurality of gaming balls pass through the connection flow path, the timing interval at which they can pass through the detection means is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing down rapidly as in the case where a plurality of game balls pass through the detection means almost simultaneously. Accordingly, it is possible to easily determine the game ball passing through the detection unit, and it is possible to easily prevent an unexpected game ball from passing through the detection unit.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching unit is disposed on the upstream side of the detection unit of the connection flow path, and a first state that restricts a game ball from entering the detection unit, and a game ball A discharge restricting means that is switchable between a second state that allows the ball to enter the detecting means, and the discharge restricting means is at least in the first state when the earliest gaming ball reaches, and the subsequent The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it can be switched in such a manner as to be in the second state when the game ball arrives.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, depending on the state change state of the discharge regulating means, there may be a case where only the subsequent gaming ball can pass through the detecting means. Even after the earliest game ball has not passed through the detection means, the player's expectation can be maintained. Therefore, the player's attention to the subsequent game ball can be improved.

  In an aspect in which the distance between the earliest game ball and the subsequent game ball is forcibly separated, the discharge restriction means when switching the difficulty of entering the detection means between the earliest game ball and the subsequent game ball is changed. The change timing of the state change can be relaxed.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect by which discharge to a detection means is made difficult by the discharge control means. For example, the game ball may be discharged to another discharge path other than the detection means, or the game ball may be temporarily stopped upstream of the discharge restriction means.

  The gaming machine F4 includes a ball entry restricting means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter the connection channel and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the connection channel. A gaming machine F5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, the timing of entering the connection flow path can be limited when the entrance restricting means is in the first state. Can be made easy.

  In the gaming machine F5, the discharge restricting means is compared with the other cases when the state changes in such a manner that the earliest gaming ball cannot pass the detecting means and the succeeding gaming ball can pass the detecting means. The game machine F6 is characterized in that the period during which the entrance restriction means is maintained in the first state is shortened.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F5, it is difficult to allow the gaming ball to enter the connection channel within a predetermined period in a situation where the succeeding gaming ball can pass the detection means. Can do.

  This makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the situation that can pass through the detection means if it is a subsequent game ball, so that the player frequently appeals to self-playing games. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the switching unit includes a deceleration unit that decelerates the game ball flowing down the connection channel, and the degree of deceleration by the deceleration unit is switched between the first game ball or the subsequent game ball. A gaming machine F7 characterized by being enabled.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball can be decelerated by the decelerating means, and the degree of the deceleration can be changed. Therefore, compared with the case where the arrangement of the earliest game ball and the subsequent game ball is defined only by the shape of the flow path through which the earliest game ball and the subsequent game ball flow down, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the connection flow path. it can.

  In the gaming machine F7, the decelerating action by the decelerating means is such that the action given to the subsequent gaming ball is made smaller than the action given to the earliest gaming ball. .

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the degree of deceleration given to the succeeding game ball by the deceleration means is suppressed, so that the flow-down mode of the succeeding game ball becomes awkward or stops midway. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the flow-down mode of the subsequent game ball.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the switching unit is formed so as to be able to prevent the passing of the game ball of the detection unit within a predetermined period, and at the start of the predetermined period, the subsequent game ball is connected to the connection channel. A gaming machine F9 that is set regardless of when entering the ball.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the start of the predetermined period can be set without being involved in the timing at which the subsequent gaming ball enters the connection channel.

  That is, when a movable member that can switch whether or not a game ball can be entered is provided at the entrance of the connection flow path, the start of a predetermined period is set regardless of the timing at which the subsequent game ball passes through the movable member. can do.

  In addition, the setting reference | standard of the start of a predetermined period is not specifically limited. For example, it may be set according to the flow-down mode of the earliest game ball, or may be set based on the opening timing of the movable mechanism that opens and closes the inlet of the connection channel.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine Machine F3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board (part of the game area)
64 Winning entrance (part of detection entrance, part of passage entrance)
87 Warp passage (part of passage)
300, 2300 delay device (delay means)
311 1st groove (part of deceleration channel)
312 Second groove (a part of the first guide channel)
312d Detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entrance, first detection port)
312e Side wall (part of connecting flow path, part of first flow path)
313 Third groove (a part of the second guide channel)
321 Slide moving member (moving means, downsizing means)
321a1 Convex part (action part)
340, 2340 Sorting device (sorting means)
341, 2341 First wall (first wall)
342 Second wall (second wall)
342a Tip convex part (part of dividing means)
350 Second adjusting device (biasing means)
400 Delayed floor device (rolling means)
410 Fan-shaped member (first floor member, part of prevention means, part of ball feeding means, intermediate floor member)
411a Chamfered part (optimal drop part)
436 Delay channel (part of pitching means)
800 V prize-winning device (part of entry restriction means)
3340 Stop device (part of deceleration means, part of switching means)
3360 Maintenance device (part of release means, deceleration means)
3363 Contact part (part of deceleration means)
4340 Sprocket (part of deceleration means)
5310, 6310, 7310, 8310, 9310 Main body member (part of connection flow path)
5311 1st groove | channel (a part of connection flow path, a part of 1st flow path, a part of 2nd flow path)
5312 2nd groove (a part of connection flow path, a part of 1st flow path, a part of 2nd flow path)
5314, 6314, 7314 Continuous passage groove (part of connecting flow path, part of second flow path)
5314a1 Upper limit discharge hole (Upper limit passage means)
5314c Second detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entrance)
5314e 3rd detection port (a part of detection means, a part of detection entrance, 2nd detection port, upper limit passage port)
5510 Movable plate (movable member)
5512 Upper extension plate (first movable member)
5513 Lower extension plate (second movable member)
5520, 6520 Driving device (part of driving means)
6510 Movable plate (movable member)
6511 Upper movable plate (first movable member)
6512 Lower movable plate (second movable member)
8313, 9313 Inclined flow path (part of connection flow path, part of first flow path, part of second flow path)
8314 Branch delay groove (part of connecting flow path, part of second flow path)
8315d V winning switch (detection means, detection entrance)
8511 Upper movable plate (part of discharge regulation means)
8512 Lower movable plate (part of discharge regulation means)
P1, P4, P6, P21, P31, P41 ball (first game ball)
P2, P5, P7, P22, P32, P42 ball (second game ball)
P11, P12 balls (game balls, other game balls)
P81, P91 game ball (first game ball)
P82, P92 game balls (following game balls)

Claims (3)

A game area where a game ball can flow down, and
Detection means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the game area;
A connection channel that connects the game area and the detection means so that a game ball can flow down;
Switching means configured to be able to switch the flow path in which the game ball flows down in the connection flow path,
The connection channel includes at least one channel, and a period required for the game ball to flow down the connection channel varies depending on which of the channels that the connection channel constitutes. A gaming machine characterized by that. The detecting means detects at least a part of the game balls flowing down the connection flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player in accordance with detecting the passage of the game balls. Provided,
The connection channel is a first channel connected to one of the detection means;
A second flow path that is at least partially different from the first flow path and is connected to one of the detection means,
The second flow path causes the game ball to flow from the game area to the detection means compared to a period required for the game ball to flow from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time. The switching means is switched to a change state where the game ball flows down the second flow path after the game ball flows down the first flow path,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein a period during which the change state is maintained is defined regardless of a game ball flowing down the second flow path.

Images